SM320C6713BPYPA200 [TI]
FLOATING-POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS; 浮点数字信号处理器![SM320C6713BPYPA200](http://pdffile.icpdf.com/pdf1/p00146/img/icpdf/SM320_806104_icpdf.jpg)
型号: | SM320C6713BPYPA200 |
厂家: | ![]() |
描述: | FLOATING-POINT DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS |
文件: | 总153页 (文件大小:2192K) |
中文: | 中文翻译 | 下载: | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
D
D
Highest-Performance Floating-Point Digital
Signal Processor (DSP): TMS320C6713B
− Eight 32-Bit Instructions/Cycle
D
16-Bit Host-Port Interface (HPI)
D
Two McASPs
− Two Independent Clock Zones Each
(1 TX and 1 RX)
− 32/64-Bit Data Word
− 300-, 225-, 200-MHz (GDP and ZDP), and
225-, 200-, 167-MHz (PYP) Clock Rates
− 3.3-, 4.4-, 5-, 6-Instruction Cycle Times
− 2400/1800, 1800/1350, 1600/1200, and
1336/1000 MIPS/MFLOPS
− Rich Peripheral Set, Optimized for Audio
− Highly Optimized C/C++ Compiler
− Extended Temperature Devices Available
− Eight Serial Data Pins Per Port:
Individually Assignable to any of the
Clock Zones
− Each Clock Zone Includes:
− Programmable Clock Generator
− Programmable Frame Sync Generator
− TDM Streams From 2-32 Time Slots
− Support for Slot Size:
8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 Bits
− Data Formatter for Bit Manipulation
− Wide Variety of I2S and Similar Bit
Stream Formats
Advanced Very Long Instruction Word
(VLIW) TMS320C67x DSP Core
− Eight Independent Functional Units:
− 2 ALUs (Fixed-Point)
− 4 ALUs (Floating-/Fixed-Point)
− 2 Multipliers (Floating-/Fixed-Point)
− Load-Store Architecture With 32 32-Bit
General-Purpose Registers
− Integrated Digital Audio Interface
Transmitter (DIT) Supports:
− S/PDIF, IEC60958-1, AES-3, CP-430
Formats
− Instruction Packing Reduces Code Size
− All Instructions Conditional
− Up to 16 transmit pins
− Enhanced Channel Status/User Data
− Extensive Error Checking and Recovery
D
D
Instruction Set Features
2
− Native Instructions for IEEE 754
− Single- and Double-Precision
− Byte-Addressable (8-, 16-, 32-Bit Data)
− 8-Bit Overflow Protection
− Saturation; Bit-Field Extract, Set, Clear;
Bit-Counting; Normalization
D
D
Two Inter-Integrated Circuit Bus (I C Bus)
Multi-Master and Slave Interfaces
Two Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports:
− Serial-Peripheral-Interface (SPI)
− High-Speed TDM Interface
− AC97 Interface
L1/L2 Memory Architecture
− 4K-Byte L1P Program Cache
(Direct-Mapped)
− 4K-Byte L1D Data Cache (2-Way)
− 256K-Byte L2 Memory Total: 64K-Byte
L2 Unified Cache/Mapped RAM, and
192K-Byte Additional L2 Mapped RAM
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Two 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers
Dedicated GPIO Module With 16 pins
(External Interrupt Capable)
Flexible Phase-Locked-Loop (PLL) Based
Clock Generator Module
†
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG )
Boundary-Scan-Compatible
D
D
Device Configuration
− Boot Mode: HPI, 8-, 16-, 32-Bit ROM Boot
− Endianness: Little Endian, Big Endian
208-Pin PowerPAD PQFP (PYP)
272-BGA Packages (GDP and ZDP)
32-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF)
− Glueless Interface to SRAM, EPROM,
Flash, SBSRAM, and SDRAM
− 512M-Byte Total Addressable External
Memory Space
0.13-µm/6-Level Copper Metal Process
− CMOS Technology
‡
D
3.3-V I/Os, 1.2 -V Internal (GDP/ZDP/ PYP)
D
3.3-V I/Os, 1.4-V Internal (GDP/ZDP) [300
MHz]
D
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (16 Independent Channels)
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
TMS320C67x and PowerPAD are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
2
I C Bus is a trademark of Philips Electronics N.V. Corporation
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
†
‡
IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
These values are compatible with existing 1.26-V designs.
ꢓ
ꢓ
ꢕ
ꢍ
ꢧ
ꢔ
ꢢ
ꢗ
ꢆ
ꢠ
ꢀ
ꢡ
ꢏ
ꢛ
ꢍ
ꢙ
ꢐ
ꢚ
ꢔ
ꢎ
ꢀ
ꢎ
ꢘ
ꢙ
ꢣ
ꢚ
ꢛ
ꢡ
ꢜ
ꢝ
ꢞ
ꢞ
ꢟ
ꢟ
ꢘ
ꢘ
ꢛ
ꢛ
ꢙ
ꢙ
ꢘ
ꢠ
ꢠ
ꢤ
ꢡ
ꢢ
ꢜ
ꢜ
ꢣ
ꢣ
ꢙ
ꢟ
ꢞ
ꢝ
ꢠ
ꢠ
ꢛ
ꢚ
ꢤ
ꢀꢣ
ꢢ
ꢥ
ꢠ
ꢦ
ꢘ
ꢡ
ꢞ
ꢠ
ꢟ
ꢘ
ꢟ
ꢛ
ꢜ
ꢙ
ꢢ
ꢧ
ꢞ
ꢙ
ꢟ
ꢟ
ꢣ
ꢠ
ꢨ
Copyright 2006, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ꢜ
ꢛ
ꢡ
ꢟ
ꢛ
ꢜ
ꢝ
ꢟ
ꢛ
ꢠ
ꢤ
ꢘ
ꢚ
ꢘ
ꢡ
ꢣ
ꢜ
ꢟ
ꢩ
ꢟ
ꢣ
ꢜ
ꢛ
ꢚ
ꢪ
ꢞ
ꢏ
ꢙ
ꢝ
ꢣ
ꢠ
ꢟ
ꢞ
ꢙ
ꢧ
ꢞ
ꢜ
ꢧ
ꢫ
ꢞ
ꢟ ꢣ ꢠ ꢟꢘ ꢙꢭ ꢛꢚ ꢞ ꢦꢦ ꢤꢞ ꢜ ꢞ ꢝ ꢣ ꢟ ꢣ ꢜ ꢠ ꢨ
ꢜ
ꢜ
ꢞ
ꢙ
ꢟ
ꢬ
ꢨ
ꢓ
ꢜ
ꢛ
ꢧ
ꢢ
ꢡ
ꢟ
ꢘ
ꢛ
ꢙ
ꢤ
ꢜ
ꢛ
ꢡ
ꢣ
ꢠ
ꢠ
ꢘ
ꢙ
ꢭ
ꢧ
ꢛ
ꢣ
ꢠ
ꢙ
ꢛ
ꢟ
ꢙ
ꢣ
ꢡ
ꢣ
ꢠ
ꢠ
ꢞ
ꢜ
ꢘ
ꢦ
ꢬ
ꢘ
ꢙ
ꢡ
ꢦ
ꢢ
ꢧ
ꢣ
1
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table of Contents
EMIF device speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
EMIF big endian mode correctness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
bootmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GDP and ZDP 272-Ball BGA package (bottom view) . . . . . 5
PYP PowerPAD QFP package (top view) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
device characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram . . . . . . . . . . 13
CPU (DSP core) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
memory map summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
peripheral register descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
signal groups description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
device configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
debugging considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
development support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
device support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CPU CSR register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
cache configuration (CCFG) register description . . . . . . . . 70
interrupts and interrupt selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
external interrupt sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
EDMA module and EDMA selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
PLL and PLL controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) peripherals . . . . . 84
I2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
absolute maximum ratings over operating case
temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of
supply voltage and operating case temperature 100
parameter measurement information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
signal transition levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
timing parameters and board routing analysis . . . . . . 103
input and output clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
asynchronous memory timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
synchronous-burst memory timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
synchronous DRAM timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
HOLD/HOLDA timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
BUSREQ timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
reset timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
external interrupt timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) timing . . . . . . 124
inter-integrated circuits (I2C) timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
host-port interface timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
multichannel buffered serial port timing . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
timer timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) port timing . . . . 143
JTAG test-port timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
mechanical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
power-down mode logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
power-supply sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
power-supply decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
REVISION HISTORY
The TMS320C6713B device-specific documentation has been split from TMS320C6713, TMS320C6713B Float-
ing−Point Digital Signal Processors, literature number SPRS186K, into a separate Data Sheet, literature number
SPRS294. It also highlights technical changes made to SPRS294 to generate SPRS294A. These changes are
marked by “[Revision A].” Additionally, made changes to SPRS294A to generate SPRS294B. These changes
are marked by “[Revision B].” Both Revision A and B changes are noted in the Revision History table below.
Scope: Updated information on McASP, McBSP and JTAG for clarification. Changed Pin Description for A12 and
B11 (Revisions SPRS294 and SPRS294A). Updated Nomenclature figure by adding device−specific information
for the ZDP package. TI Recommends for new designs that the following pins be configured as such:
D
D
Pin A12 connected directly to CV
(core power)
DD
Pin B11 connected directly to V (ground)
ss
PAGE(S)
NO.
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
6
Terminal Assignments for the 272-Ball GDP and ZDP Packages (in Order of Ball No.) table:
Updated Signal Name for Ball No. A12
Updated Signal Name for Ball No. B11
10
32
33
33
37
46
47
49
50
50
55
57
PYP PowerPAD QFP package (top view):
Updated drawing
Device Configurations, device configurations at device reset section:
Updated “For proper device operation...” paragraph [Revision B]
Device Configurations, Device Configurations Pins at Device Reset (HD[4:3], HD8, HD12, and CLKMODE0) section:
Removed “CE1 width 32−bit” from Functional Description for “00” in HD[4:3](BOOTMODE) Configuration Pin
Device Configurations, Device Configurations Pins at Device Reset (HD[4:3], HD8, HD12, and CLKMODE0) section:
Updated “All other HD pins...” footnote [Revision B]
Table 22 Peripheral Pin Selection Matrix:
Updated/changed MCBSP0DIS (DEVCFG bit) from “ACLKKO” to “ACLKXO”
Configuration Example F (1 McBSP + HPI + 1 McASP) figure:
Updated from McBSP1DIS = 1 to McBSP1DIS = 0
Device Configurations, debugging considerations section:
Updated “Internal pullup/pulldown resistors...” paragraph [Revision B]
Terminal Functions, Resets and Interrupts section:
Updated IPU/IPD for RESET Signal Name from “IPU” to “−−”
Terminal Functions table, Host Port Interface section:
Removed “CE1 width 32−bit” from Description for “00” in Bootmode HD[4:3]
Terminal Functions table, Host Port Interface section:
Updated “Other HD pins...” paragraph [Revision B]
Terminal Functions, Timer 1 section:
Updated Description for TINP1/AHCLKX0 Signal Name
Terminal Functions, Reserved for Test section:
Updated Description for RSV Signal Name, 181 PYP, A12 GDP/ZDP
Updated Description for RSV Signal Name, 180 PYP, B11 GDP/ZDP
3
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PAGE(S)
NO.
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
57
Terminal Functions, Reserved for Test section:
Updated/changed Description for RSV Signal Name, A12 GDP (to “recommended”) − [Revision A]
Updated/changed Description for RSV Signal Name, B11 GDP (to “recommended”) − [Revision A]
57
Terminal Functions, Reserved for Test section:
Updated/changed Description for RSV Signal Name D12 to include PYP 178 as follows:
“...the D12/178 pin must be externally pulled down with a 10−kΩ resistor.” [Revision B]
66
67
92
93
Device Support, device and development-support tool nomenclature section:
Updated figure for clarity
Device Support, document support section:
Updated paragraphs for clarity
Power−Down Mode Logic − Triggering, Wake−up and Effects section:
Updated paragraphs [Revision B]
Power−Down Mode Logic − Triggering, Wake−up and Effects section, Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes table:
Added “It is recommended to use the PLLPWDN bit (PLLCSR.1) as an alternative to PD3” to PRWD Field (BITS 15−10) −
011100 − Effect on Chip’s Operation [Revision B]
93
95
96
Power−Down Mode Logic − Triggering, Wake−up and Effects section, Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes table:
Deleted three paragraphs following table [Revision B]
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement section:
Updated/added paragraphs for clarity
EMIF Device Speed section, Example Boards and Maximum EMIF Speed table:
Type − 3−Loads Short Traces, EMIF Interface Components section:
Updated from “32−Bit SDRAMs” to “16−Bit SDRAMs” [Revision B]
95
99
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Compatibility Statement section:
Updated/added paragraphs for clarity
Recommended Operating Conditions:
Added V
Added V
Maximum voltage during overshoot row and associated footnote
Maximum voltage during undershoot row and associated footnote
OS,
US,
102
124
124
Parameter Measurement Information, AC transient rise/fall time specifications section:
Added AC Transient Specification Rise Time figure
Added AC Transient Specification Fall Time figure
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT (McASP) TIMING:
timing requirements for McASP section:
Updated Parameter No. 3, t
from “33” to “greater of 2P or 33 ns” and added associated footnote
c(ACKRX),
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT (McASP) TIMING:
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McASP section:
Updated Parameter No. 11, t
from “33” to “greater of 2P or 33 ns” and added associated footnote
c(ACKRX),
125, 126 MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT (McASP) TIMING section:
Updated McASP Input and Output drawings
134
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING section:
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP section:
Updated McBSP Timings figure
147
Mechanical Data section:
Added statement to the Packaging Information section
4
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
GDP and ZDP 272-Ball BGA package (bottom view)
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢍ ꢗ ꢀ ꢄ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢄ ꢴ
ꢮ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢺ
ꢊ ꢖ ꢄ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢼ
ꢽ
ꢮ
ꢗ
ꢀ
ꢎ ꢕ ꢔ ꢼ
ꢂꢂ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢄ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢈ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢲ
ꢮ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢉ ꢰ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢉ ꢃ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢉ ꢇ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢉ ꢱ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢉ ꢺ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢄ ꢅ
ꢆ ꢖ ꢉ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢖ
ꢆ
ꢌ
ꢯ
ꢍ
ꢗ
ꢀ
ꢖ
ꢆ
ꢌ
ꢯ
ꢏ
ꢐ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢎ ꢍ ꢖꢹ
ꢂ ꢔ ꢕ ꢎ ꢂꢹ
ꢂ ꢂ ꢍ ꢖ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ
ꢖ
ꢄ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢰ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢃ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢇ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ
ꢮ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢉ
ꢉ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢈ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢇ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢉ ꢲ
ꢆ ꢖ ꢅ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢎ ꢕ ꢖꢹ
ꢂ ꢔ ꢆ ꢎ ꢂꢹ
ꢂ ꢂ ꢎ ꢔ ꢂ
ꢎ ꢽ ꢖ ꢹ
ꢂ ꢔ ꢽ ꢖꢹ
ꢂ ꢂ ꢽ ꢖ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢲ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢉ
ꢊ
ꢖ
ꢃ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ
ꢖ
ꢃ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢱ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢺ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢉ
ꢅ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢉ
ꢈ
ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢖ
ꢎ
ꢉ
ꢄ
ꢊ
ꢖ
ꢅ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢅ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢄ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢰ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ
ꢔ
ꢄ
ꢃ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢖ ꢎ ꢄ ꢉ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢃ
ꢊ
ꢖ
ꢉ
ꢮ
ꢂ ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢱ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢈ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢲ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢱ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉꢉ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢰ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢄ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ ꢅ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢕ
ꢓ
ꢐ
ꢁ
ꢌ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢇ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢃ ꢅ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢲ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢇ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ ꢺ
ꢂ ꢆ ꢌ ꢅ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢔ
ꢎ
ꢅ
ꢖ
ꢔ
ꢃ
ꢉ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢈ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢰ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢺ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢱ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢕ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢇ ꢴ
ꢔ ꢕ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢂ ꢔ ꢎ ꢉ
ꢋ ꢂ ꢕ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢈ ꢴ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢶ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢱ ꢴ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢶ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢁ ꢗ ꢀ ꢖ ꢅ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢋ
ꢂ
ꢶ
ꢉ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢄ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢅ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢃ
ꢖ ꢔ ꢉ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢂ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢻ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢕ ꢅ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢯ
ꢾ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢔ ꢕ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢅ ꢴ
ꢋ ꢂ ꢕ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢋ ꢂ ꢕ ꢅ
ꢊ ꢗ ꢂ
ꢕ ꢖ ꢿ
ꢻ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉ ꢴ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢻ
ꢍ
ꢌ
ꢔ
ꢻ
ꢍ
ꢌ
ꢔ
ꢎ
ꢔ ꢶ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢉ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢕ ꢔ ꢼꢹ
ꢎ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢕ ꢉ
ꢻ ꢻ ꢽ ꢏ ꢌ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢋ ꢂ ꢕ ꢉ
ꢋ ꢂ ꢶ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢋ ꢂ ꢶ ꢅ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢕ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢕ ꢅ
ꢻ
ꢑ
ꢋ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢀꢍ ꢗ ꢀ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢄ ꢴ
ꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢓ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢃ ꢴ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢶ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢶ ꢅ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢻ ꢆ ꢐ ꢀ ꢌ ꢅ ꢹ ꢻ ꢆ ꢐ ꢀ ꢌ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢉ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢕ ꢹ ꢽꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢅ ꢴ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢎ
ꢶ
ꢕ
ꢉ
ꢳ
ꢃ
ꢴ
ꢀꢍ ꢗ ꢀ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢅ ꢳ ꢰ ꢴ
ꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢓ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢻ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢶ ꢅ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢂ ꢄꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢱ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢆ ꢂꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢄ ꢴ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢻ ꢎ ꢂꢹ
ꢎ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢶ ꢉ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢂ ꢉꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢇ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢰ ꢴ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢂ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢂ ꢆ ꢌ ꢉ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢈ ꢴ
ꢵ ꢖ ꢶ ꢀ ꢷ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢈ ꢸ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢖ
ꢔ
ꢆ
ꢊ
ꢎ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢇ ꢴ
ꢵ ꢖ ꢶ ꢀ ꢷ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢇ ꢸ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢄ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢋ ꢂ ꢶ ꢉ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢶ ꢕ ꢉ ꢳ ꢈ ꢴ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ
ꢁ
ꢗ
ꢄ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢕ
ꢂ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢖ
ꢁ
ꢗ
ꢅ
ꢆ
ꢌ
ꢯ
ꢍ
ꢗ
ꢀ
ꢃ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢕ
ꢂ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢑ
ꢓ
ꢳ
ꢱ
ꢴ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢰ ꢴ ꢹ
ꢵ ꢖ ꢶ ꢀ ꢷ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢱ ꢸ ꢹ ꢵ ꢖ ꢶ ꢀ ꢷ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢰ ꢸ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢁ ꢗ ꢀ ꢖ ꢏ ꢐ ꢅ ꢎ ꢁ ꢗ ꢀ ꢖ ꢏ ꢐ ꢉ
ꢆ
ꢌ
ꢯ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉ ꢰ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉ ꢰ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉ ꢄ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉ ꢄ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢲ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢲ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢇ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢻ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢕ ꢉ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢰ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢅ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢃ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢁ ꢗ ꢀ ꢖ ꢉ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢓ ꢌ ꢌ ꢻ ꢮ
ꢕ ꢂ ꢮ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ ꢁ ꢗ ꢰ
ꢕ ꢂ ꢮ
ꢕ
ꢂ
ꢮ
ꢐ
ꢁ
ꢏ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢁ
ꢍ
ꢔ
ꢖ
ꢅ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉ ꢅ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉ ꢅ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢺ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢺ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢱ ꢹ
ꢎ ꢻ ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢶ ꢉ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉ ꢱ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉ ꢱ ꢴ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢀ
ꢕ
ꢂ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢖ
ꢁ
ꢗ
ꢱ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂ ꢂ
ꢖ
ꢁ
ꢗ
ꢉ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢂꢂ
ꢂꢂ
ꢖ
ꢁ
ꢗ
ꢃ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉ ꢃ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉ ꢃ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢉꢉ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢉꢉ ꢴ
ꢻ ꢔ ꢈ ꢹ
ꢑ ꢓ ꢳ ꢃ ꢴ
ꢆ ꢌ ꢯ ꢏ ꢐ
ꢃ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢕ ꢂ ꢮ
ꢱ
ꢀ ꢆ ꢯ
ꢇ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢮ
ꢂ ꢂ
ꢀ ꢔ ꢏ
ꢈ
ꢀ ꢔ ꢍ
ꢺ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢲ
ꢆ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢕ ꢂ ꢮ
ꢉ ꢄ
ꢕ ꢖ ꢂ ꢖ ꢀ
ꢉ ꢃ
ꢮ
ꢂꢂ
ꢔ ꢮ
ꢔ ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢔ
ꢉ
ꢄ
ꢰ
ꢉ
ꢅ
ꢉ
ꢉ
ꢉ
ꢰ
ꢉ
ꢱ
ꢉ
ꢇ
ꢉ
ꢈ
ꢉ
ꢺ
ꢉ
ꢲ
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢃ
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢆ
ꢃ
ꢇ
ꢅ
ꢈ
ꢉ
ꢇ
ꢊ
ꢉ
ꢁ
ꢇ
ꢋ
ꢌ
ꢍ
ꢎ
ꢂ
ꢏ
ꢐ
ꢂ
ꢆ
ꢇ
ꢎ
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢑ
ꢒ
ꢅ
ꢏ
ꢉ
ꢄ
ꢈ
ꢅ
ꢊ
ꢉ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢉ
ꢃ
ꢓ
ꢈ
ꢎ
ꢈ
ꢒ
ꢉ
ꢈ
ꢅ
ꢉ
ꢁ
ꢇ
ꢍ
ꢔ
ꢍ
ꢎ
ꢂ
ꢏ
ꢐ
ꢂ
ꢆ
ꢇ
ꢕ
5
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table 1. Terminal Assignments for the 272-Ball GDP and ZDP Packages (in Order of Ball No.)
BALL NO.
A1
SIGNAL NAME
BALL NO.
C1
SIGNAL NAME
V
V
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1
SS
A2
C2
SS
A3
CLKIN
CV
C3
CV
DD
A4
C4
CLKMODE0
PLLHV
DD
A5
RSV
TCK
TDI
C5
A6
C6
V
SS
CV
A7
C7
DD
A8
TDO
C8
V
V
SS
SS
A9
CV
CV
C9
DD
DD
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
B1
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
D1
DV
DD
V
SS
EMU4
RSV [connect directly to CV
RESET
]
RSV
DD
NMI
V
SS
HD14/GP[14]
HD12/GP[12]
HD9/GP[9]
HD6/AHCLKR1
HD13/GP[13]
HD11/GP[11]
DV
DD
HD7/GP[3]
CV
DD
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
HD4/GP[0]
HD3/AMUTE1
DV
DD
B2
CV
DV
D2
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
EMU2
DD
DD
B3
D3
B4
V
SS
D4
V
SS
B5
RSV
TRST
TMS
D5
CV
CV
DD
DD
B6
D6
B7
D7
RSV
B8
DV
D8
V
SS
DD
B9
EMU1
D9
EMU0
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
EMU3
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
CLKOUT3
RSV [connect directly to V
EMU5
]
CV
DD
RSV
SS
DV
V
SS
DD
HD15/GP[15]
CV
CV
DV
DD
DD
DD
V
SS
HD10/GP[10]
HD8/GP[8]
V
SS
HD2/AFSX1
DV
HD5/AHCLKX1
CV
DD
DD
HD1/AXR1[7]
V
SS
Shading denotes the GDP and ZDP package pin functions that drop out on the PYP package.
6
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table 1. Terminal Assignments for the 272-Ball GDP and ZDP Package (in Order of Ball No.) (Continued)
BALL NO.
E1
SIGNAL NAME
CLKS1/SCL1
BALL NO.
J17
J18
J19
J20
K1
SIGNAL NAME
HOLD
E2
V
HOLDA
SS
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
E3
BUSREQ
E4
V
V
HINT/GP[1]
SS
E17
E18
E19
E20
F1
CV
DD
SS
HAS/ACLKX1
HDS1/AXR1[6]
HD0/AXR1[4]
K2
V
SS
CLKS0/AHCLKR0
CV
K3
K4
DD
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
TINP1/AHCLKX0
K9
V
V
V
V
SS
F2
K10
K11
K12
K17
K18
K19
K20
L1
SS
SS
SS
F3
DV
CV
CV
DD
DD
DD
F4
F17
F18
F19
F20
G1
CV
DD
HDS2/AXR1[5]
ED0
ED1
V
SS
HCS/AXR1[2]
V
SS
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
TINP0/AXR0[3]
CLKX0/ACLKX0
FSX1
G2
L2
DX1/AXR0[5]
CLKX1/AMUTE0
G3
L3
G4
V
V
L4
CV
DD
SS
G17
G18
G19
G20
H1
L9
V
V
V
V
SS
SS
HCNTL0/AXR1[3]
HCNTL1/AXR1[1]
HR/W/AXR1[0]
FSX0/AFSX0
L10
L11
L12
L17
L18
L19
L20
M1
SS
SS
SS
CV
DD
H2
DX0/AXR0[1]
ED2
ED3
H3
CLKR0/ACLKR0
H4
V
V
CV
DD
SS
H17
H18
H19
H20
J1
CLKR1/AXR0[6]
DR1/SDA1
SS
DV
M2
DD
HRDY/ACLKR1
HHWIL/AFSR1
DR0/AXR0[0]
M3
FSR1/AXR0[7]
M4
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
M9
J2
DV
M10
M11
M12
M17
M18
M19
M20
DD
FSR0/AFSR0
J3
J4
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
J9
J10
J11
J12
DV
DD
ED4
ED5
Shading denotes the GDP and ZDP package pin functions that drop out on the PYP package.
7
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table 1. Terminal Assignments for the 272-Ball GDP and ZDP Package (in Order of Ball No.) (Continued)
BALL NO.
N1
SIGNAL NAME
BALL NO.
U9
SIGNAL NAME
SCL0
SDA0
ED31
V
SS
N2
U10
U11
U12
U13
U14
U15
U16
U17
U18
U19
U20
V1
CV
CV
DV
DD
DD
DD
N3
N4
V
V
SS
N17
N18
N19
N20
P1
V
SS
SS
ED6
CV
CV
DV
DD
DD
DD
ED7
ED8
ED28
ED29
ED30
V
SS
P2
EA21
BE1
P3
P4
V
V
V
SS
SS
P17
P18
P19
P20
R1
ED20
ED19
SS
ED9
V2
V
V3
CV
DD
SS
ED10
DV
V4
ED16
BE3
CE3
EA3
EA5
EA8
EA10
V5
DD
R2
ED27
ED26
V6
R3
V7
R4
CV
CV
DV
V8
DD
DD
DD
R17
R18
R19
R20
T1
V9
V10
V11
V12
V13
V14
V15
V16
V17
V18
V19
V20
W1
ED11
ED12
ED24
ED25
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
DV
DD
EA12
DV
T2
T3
DV
DD
DD
T4
V
SS
V
SS
EA17
CE0
T17
T18
T19
T20
U1
ED13
ED15
ED14
ED22
ED21
ED23
CV
DV
DD
DD
BE0
V
SS
U2
W2
CV
DV
DD
DD
U3
W3
U4
V
SS
W4
ED17
U5
DV
CV
DV
W5
V
SS
DD
DD
DD
U6
W6
CE2
EA4
EA6
U7
W7
U8
V
SS
W8
Shading denotes the GDP and ZDP package pin functions that drop out on the PYP package.
8
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table 1. Terminal Assignments for the 272-Ball GDP and ZDP Package (in Order of Ball No.) (Continued)
BALL NO.
W9
SIGNAL NAME
BALL NO.
Y5
SIGNAL NAME
DV
ARDY
EA2
DD
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
W15
W16
W17
W18
W19
W20
Y1
Y6
V
SS
DV
Y7
DV
DD
Y8
EA7
EA9
DD
EA11
EA13
EA15
Y9
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y19
Y20
ECLKOUT
ECLKIN
V
SS
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
EA19
CE1
V
SS
EA14
EA16
EA18
CV
DD
V
V
V
SS
DV
DD
EA20
SS
SS
Y2
Y3
ED18
BE2
V
V
SS
Y4
SS
Shading denotes the GDP and ZDP package pin functions that drop out on the PYP package.
9
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PYP PowerPAD QFP package (top view)
PYP 208-PIN PowerPAD PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK (PQFP)
(TOP VIEW)
CV
DD
CE1
CE0
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
CV
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
DD
V
SS
HD5/AHCLKX1
HD8/GP[8]
EA20
EA19
EA17
HD6/AHCLKR1
DV
DD
V
DV
V
SS
DD
HD7/GP[3]
HD9/GP[9]
SS
CV
DD
EA18
EA15
EA12
EA16
EA13
EA14
HD10/GP[10]
HD11/GP[11]
HD12/GP[12]
CV
DD
V
SS
DD
CV
CV
SS
HD13/GP[13]
HD14/GP[14]
HD15/GP[15]
DD
Exposed
Thermal
PAD
V
DV
DD
EA11
NMI
RESET
V
DV
SS
DD
CV
DD
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
V
CV
SS
DD
8,30
6,79
V
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
ECLKIN
ECLKOUT
SS
DD
DV
CLKOUT3
EMU1
EA10
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
EA9
EMU0
TDO
DV
V
DD
SS
DD
SS
V
DV
DD
CV
EA8
TDI
TMS
TCK
EA7
EA6
EA5
V
SS
CV
DD
CV
DD
CV
SS
DD
V
DV
DD
TRST
RSV
V
RSV
CV
EA4
EA3
EA2
CE2
8,30
6,79
SS
CV
DD
DD
PLLHV
V
CLKIN
CLKMODE0
V
SS
DV
DD
SS
CE3
ARDY
DV
DV
DD
DD
V
V
CV
SS
CV
SS
DD
DD
NOTE: All linear dimensions are in millimeters. This pad is electrically and thermally connected to the backside of the die.
For the TMS320C6713B 208-Pin PowerPAD plastic quad flatpack, the external thermal pad dimensions are: 7.2 x 7.2 mm and the thermal
pad is externally flush with the mold compound.
10
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢌ
ꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢎꢀ
ꢏ
ꢐ
ꢑ
ꢒ
ꢓ
ꢍꢏ
ꢐ
ꢀ
ꢔ
ꢏ
ꢑꢏ
ꢀꢎ
ꢌ
ꢂ
ꢏ
ꢑ
ꢐ
ꢎ
ꢓ
ꢕ
ꢍ
ꢆ
ꢖ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢍ
ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
description
†
The TMS320C67xt DSPs (including the TMS320C6713B device ) compose the floating-point DSP generation
in the TMS320C6000t DSP platform. The C6713B device is based on the high-performance, advanced
very-long-instruction-word (VLIW) architecture developed by Texas Instruments (TI), making this DSP an
excellent choice for multichannel and multifunction applications.
Operating at 225 MHz, the C6713B delivers up to 1350 million floating-point operations per second (MFLOPS),
1800 million instructions per second (MIPS), and with dual fixed-/floating-point multipliers up to 450 million
multiply-accumulate operations per second (MMACS).
Operating at 300 MHz, the C6713B delivers up to 1800 million floating-point operations per second (MFLOPS),
2400 million instructions per second (MIPS), and with dual fixed-/floating-point multipliers up to 600 million
multiply-accumulate operations per second (MMACS).
The C6713B uses a two-level cache-based architecture and has a powerful and diverse set of peripherals. The
Level 1 program cache (L1P) is a 4K-byte direct-mapped cache and the Level 1 data cache (L1D) is a 4K-byte
2-way set-associative cache. The Level 2 memory/cache (L2) consists of a 256K-byte memory space that is
shared between program and data space. 64K bytes of the 256K bytes in L2 memory can be configured as
mapped memory, cache, or combinations of the two. The remaining 192K bytes in L2 serves as mapped SRAM.
The C6713B has a rich peripheral set that includes two Multichannel Audio Serial Ports (McASPs), two
Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports (McBSPs), two Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) buses, one dedicated
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) module, two general-purpose timers, a host-port interface (HPI), and a
glueless external memory interface (EMIF) capable of interfacing to SDRAM, SBSRAM, and asynchronous
peripherals.
The two McASP interface modules each support one transmit and one receive clock zone. Each of the McASP
has eight serial data pins which can be individually allocated to any of the two zones. The serial port supports
time-division multiplexing on each pin from 2 to 32 time slots. The C6713B has sufficient bandwidth to support
all 16 serial data pins transmitting a 192 kHz stereo signal. Serial data in each zone may be transmitted and
received on multiple serial data pins simultaneously and formatted in a multitude of variations on the Philips
Inter-IC Sound (I2S) format.
In addition, the McASP transmitter may be programmed to output multiple S/PDIF, IEC60958, AES-3, CP-430
encoded data channels simultaneously, with a single RAM containing the full implementation of user data and
channel status fields.
The McASP also provides extensive error-checking and recovery features, such as the bad clock detection
circuit for each high-frequency master clock which verifies that the master clock is within a programmed
frequency range.
The two I2C ports on the TMS320C6713B allow the DSP to easily control peripheral devices and communicate
with a host processor. In addition, the standard multichannel buffered serial port (McBSP) may be used to
communicate with serial peripheral interface (SPI) mode peripheral devices.
The TMS320C6713B device has two bootmodes: from the HPI or from external asynchronous ROM. For more
detailed information, see the bootmode section of this data sheet.
The TMS320C67x DSP generation is supported by the TI eXpressDSPt set of industry benchmark
development tools, including a highly optimizing C/C++ Compiler, the Code Composer Studiot Integrated
Development Environment (IDE), JTAG-based emulation and real-time debugging, and the DSP/BIOSt
kernel.
TMS320C6000, eXpressDSP, Code Composer Studio, and DSP/BIOS are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
†
Throughout the remainder of this document, TMS320C6713B shall be referred to as C6713B or 13B.
11
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
device characteristics
Table 2 provides an overview of the C6713B DSP. The table shows significant features of the device, including
the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the execution time, and the package type with pin count. For more
details on the C67x DSP device part numbers and part numbering, see Figure 12.
Table 2. Characteristics of the C6713B Processor
C6713B
INTERNAL CLOCK
(FLOATING-POINT DSP)
HARDWARE FEATURES
SOURCE
GDP/ZDP
PYP
EMIF
SYSCLK3 or ECLKIN
CPU clock frequency
SYSCLK2
1 (32 bit)
1 (16 bit)
Peripherals
EDMA
(16 Channels)
1
Not all peripheral pins are
available at the same
time. (For more details,
see the Device
HPI (16 bit)
McASPs
1
†
AUXCLK, SYSCLK2
SYSCLK2
2
I2Cs
2
Configurations section.)
McBSPs
SYSCLK2
2
2
Peripheral performance is
dependent on chip-level
configuration.
32-Bit Timers
GPIO Module
Size (Bytes)
1/2 of SYSCLK2
SYSCLK2
1
264K
4K-Byte (4KB) L1 Program (L1P) Cache
4KB L1 Data (L1D) Cache
64KB Unified L2 Cache/Mapped RAM
192KB L2 Mapped RAM
On-Chip Memory
Organization
CPU ID+CPU Rev ID
BSDL File
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])
For the C6713B BSDL file, contact your Field Sales Representative.
0x0203
Frequency
MHz
300, 225, 200
225, 200, 167
3.3 ns (GDP-300, ZDP-300)
4.4 ns (GDP-225, ZDP-225)
5 ns (GDPA-200,
5 ns (PYP-200)
4.4 ns (PYP-225)
6 ns (PYPA−167)
5 ns (PYPA-200)
Cycle Time
ns
ZDPA-200)
‡
1.20
V
Core (V)
I/O (V)
1.2 V
1.4 V (−300)
Voltage
3.3 V
Prescaler
Multiplier
Postscaler
/1, /2, /3, ..., /32
x4, x5, x6, ..., x25
/1, /2, /3, ..., /32
Clock Generator Options
272-Ball BGA (GDP)
272-Ball BGA (ZDP)
27 x 27 mm
−
Packages
208-Pin PowerPAD
28 x 28 mm
−
PQFP (PYP)
Process Technology
µm
0.13
Product Status
Product Preview (PP)
Advance Information (AI)
Production Data (PD)
§
PD
†
AUXCLK is the McASP internal high-frequency clock source for serial transfers. SYSCLK2 is the McASP system clock used for the clock
check (high-frequency) circuit.
This value is compatible with existing 1.26-V designs.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments
standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
‡
§
C67x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
12
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram
Digital Signal Processor
32
L1P Cache
Direct Mapped
4K Bytes Total
EMIF
L2 Cache/
Memory
4 Banks
64K Bytes
Total
McASP1
McASP0
McBSP1
McBSP0
I2C1
C67x CPU
(up to
4-Way)
Instruction Fetch
Instruction Dispatch
Instruction Decode
Control
Registers
Control
Logic
Data Path A
Data Path B
Test
A Register File
B Register File
In-Circuit
Emulation
Enhanced
DMA
Interrupt
Control
†
†
†
†
†
†
.L1 .S1 .M1 .D1
.D2 .M2 .S2 .L2
Controller
(16 channel)
I2C0
L1D Cache
2-Way
Set Associative
4K Bytes
L2
Memory
192K
Bytes
Timer 1
Timer 0
Clock Generator and PLL
x4 through x25 Multiplier
/1 through /32 Dividers
Power-Down
Logic
GPIO
HPI
16
†
In addition to fixed-point instructions, these functional units execute floating-point instructions.
EMIF interfaces to:
−SDRAM
−SBSRAM
McBSPs interface to:
−SPI Control Port
−High-Speed TDM Codecs
−AC97 Codecs
McASPs interface to:
−I2S Multichannel ADC, DAC, Codec, DIR
−DIT: Multiple Outputs
−SRAM,
−ROM/Flash, and
−I/O devices
−Serial EEPROM
13
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
CPU (DSP core) description
The TMS320C6713B floating-point digital signal processor is based on the C67x CPU. The CPU fetches
advanced very-long instruction words (VLIW) (256 bits wide) to supply up to eight 32-bit instructions to the eight
functional units during every clock cycle. The VLIW architecture features controls by which all eight units do not
have to be supplied with instructions if they are not ready to execute. The first bit of every 32-bit instruction
determines if the next instruction belongs to the same execute packet as the previous instruction, or whether
it should be executed in the following clock as a part of the next execute packet. Fetch packets are always 256
bits wide; however, the execute packets can vary in size. The variable-length execute packets are a key
memory-saving feature, distinguishing the C67x CPU from other VLIW architectures.
The CPU features two sets of functional units. Each set contains four units and a register file. One set contains
functional units .L1, .S1, .M1, and .D1; the other set contains units .D2, .M2, .S2, and .L2. The two register files
each contain 16 32-bit registers for a total of 32 general-purpose registers. The two sets of functional units, along
with two register files, compose sides A and B of the CPU (see the functional block and CPU diagram and
Figure 1). The four functional units on each side of the CPU can freely share the 16 registers belonging to that
side. Additionally, each side features a single data bus connected to all the registers on the other side, by which
the two sets of functional units can access data from the register files on the opposite side. While register access
by functional units on the same side of the CPU as the register file can service all the units in a single clock cycle,
register access using the register file across the CPU supports one read and one write per cycle.
The C67x CPU executes all C62x instructions. In addition to C62x fixed-point instructions, the six out of eight
functional units (.L1, .S1, .M1, .M2, .S2, and .L2) also execute floating-point instructions. The remaining two
functional units (.D1 and .D2) also execute the new LDDW instruction which loads 64 bits per CPU side for a
total of 128 bits per cycle.
Another key feature of the C67x CPU is the load/store architecture, where all instructions operate on registers
(as opposed to data in memory). Two sets of data-addressing units (.D1 and .D2) are responsible for all data
transfers between the register files and the memory. The data address driven by the .D units allows data
addresses generated from one register file to be used to load or store data to or from the other register file. The
C67x CPU supports a variety of indirect addressing modes using either linear- or circular-addressing modes
with 5- or 15-bit offsets. All instructions are conditional, and most can access any one of the 32 registers. Some
registers, however, are singled out to support specific addressing or to hold the condition for conditional
instructions (if the condition is not automatically “true”). The two .M functional units are dedicated for multiplies.
The two .S and .L functional units perform a general set of arithmetic, logical, and branch functions with results
available every clock cycle.
The processing flow begins when a 256-bit-wide instruction fetch packet is fetched from a program memory.
The 32-bit instructions destined for the individual functional units are “linked” together by “1” bits in the least
significant bit (LSB) position of the instructions. The instructions that are “chained” together for simultaneous
execution (up to eight in total) compose an execute packet. A “0” in the LSB of an instruction breaks the chain,
effectively placing the instructions that follow it in the next execute packet. If an execute packet crosses the
fetch-packet boundary (256 bits wide), the assembler places it in the next fetch packet, while the remainder of
the current fetch packet is padded with NOP instructions. The number of execute packets within a fetch packet
can vary from one to eight. Execute packets are dispatched to their respective functional units at the rate of one
per clock cycle and the next 256-bit fetch packet is not fetched until all the execute packets from the current fetch
packet have been dispatched. After decoding, the instructions simultaneously drive all active functional units
for a maximum execution rate of eight instructions every clock cycle. While most results are stored in 32-bit
registers, they can be subsequently moved to memory as bytes or half-words as well. All load and store
instructions are byte-, half-word, or word-addressable.
14
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
CPU (DSP core) description (continued)
src1
†
.L1
src2
dst
8
8
long dst
long src
8
32
LD1 32 MSB
ST1
32
Register
File A
(A0−A15)
long src
long dst
dst
8
Data Path A
†
.S1
src1
src2
dst
†
.M1
src1
src2
LD1 32 LSB
DA1
dst
src1
src2
.D1
2X
1X
src2
src1
dst
DA2
.D2
.M2
LD2 32 LSB
src2
†
src1
dst
src2
Register
File B
(B0−B15)
src1
dst
†
.S2
Data Path B
8
8
long dst
long src
8
32
32
LD2 32 MSB
ST2
long src
long dst
dst
8
†
.L2
src2
src1
Control
Register File
†
In addition to fixed-point instructions, these functional units execute floating-point instructions.
Figure 1. TMS320C67x CPU (DSP Core) Data Paths
15
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
memory map summary
Table 3 shows the memory map address ranges of the device.
Table 3. Memory Map Summary
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
Internal RAM (L2)
Internal RAM/Cache
Reserved
BLOCK SIZE (BYTES)
192K
64K
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
0000 0000 – 0002 FFFF
0003 0000 – 0003 FFFF
0004 0000 – 017F FFFF
0180 0000 – 0183 FFFF
0184 0000 – 0185 FFFF
0186 0000 – 0187 FFFF
0188 0000 – 018B FFFF
018C 0000 – 018F FFFF
0190 0000 – 0193 FFFF
0194 0000 – 0197 FFFF
0198 0000 – 019B FFFF
019C 0000 – 019C 01FF
019C 0200 – 019C 0203
019C 0204 – 019F FFFF
01A0 0000 – 01A3 FFFF
01A4 0000 – 01AF FFFF
01B0 0000 – 01B0 3FFF
01B0 4000 – 01B3 FFFF
01B4 0000 – 01B4 3FFF
01B4 4000 – 01B4 7FFF
01B4 8000 – 01B4 BFFF
01B4 C000 – 01B4 FFFF
01B5 0000 – 01B5 3FFF
01B5 4000 – 01B7 BFFF
01B7 C000 – 01B7 DFFF
01B7 E000 – 01BB FFFF
01BC 0000 – 01BF FFFF
01C0 0000 – 01FF FFFF
0200 0000 – 0200 0033
0200 0034 – 02FF FFFF
0300 0000 – 2FFF FFFF
3000 0000 – 33FF FFFF
3400 0000 – 37FF FFFF
3800 0000 – 3BFF FFFF
3C00 0000 – 3C0F FFFF
3C10 0000 – 3C1F FFFF
3C20 0000 – 7FFF FFFF
8000 0000 – 8FFF FFFF
9000 0000 – 9FFF FFFF
A000 0000 – AFFF FFFF
B000 0000 – BFFF FFFF
C000 0000 – FFFF FFFF
24M – 256K
256K
128K
128K
256K
256K
256K
256K
256K
512
External Memory Interface (EMIF) Registers
L2 Registers
Reserved
HPI Registers
McBSP 0 Registers
McBSP 1 Registers
Timer 0 Registers
Timer 1 Registers
Interrupt Selector Registers
Device Configuration Registers
Reserved
4
256K − 516
256K
768K
16K
EDMA RAM and EDMA Registers
Reserved
GPIO Registers
Reserved
240K
16K
I2C0 Registers
I2C1 Registers
16K
Reserved
16K
McASP0 Registers
McASP1 Registers
Reserved
16K
16K
160K
8K
PLL Registers
Reserved
264K
256K
4M
Emulation Registers
Reserved
QDMA Registers
Reserved
52
16M − 52
720M
64M
Reserved
McBSP0 Data Port
McBSP1 Data Port
Reserved
64M
64M
McASP0 Data Port
McASP1 Data Port
Reserved
1M
1M
1G + 62M
256M
256M
256M
256M
1G
†
†
†
†
EMIF CE0
EMIF CE1
EMIF CE2
EMIF CE3
Reserved
†
The number of EMIF address pins (EA[21:2]) limits the maximum addressable memory (SDRAM) to 128MB per CE space.
16
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
L2 memory structure expanded
Figure 2 shows the detail of the L2 memory structure.
L2 Mode
L2 Memory
Block Base Address
0x0000 0000
000
001
010
011
111
192K-Byte RAM
0x0003 0000
16K-Byte RAM
16K-Byte RAM
0x0003 4000
0x0003 8000
16K-Byte RAM
16K-Byte RAM
0x0003 C000
0x0003 FFFF
Figure 2. L2 Memory Configuration
17
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions
Table 4 through Table 17 identify the peripheral registers for the device by their register names, acronyms, and
hex address or hex address range. For more detailed information on the register contents, bit names and their
descriptions, see the specific peripheral reference guide listed in the TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
Table 4. EMIF Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
0180 0000
ACRONYM
GBLCTL
CECTL1
CECTL0
−
REGISTER NAME
EMIF global control
EMIF CE1 space control
EMIF CE0 space control
Reserved
0180 0004
0180 0008
0180 000C
0180 0010
CECTL2
CECTL3
SDCTL
SDTIM
SDEXT
−
EMIF CE2 space control
EMIF CE3 space control
EMIF SDRAM control
EMIF SDRAM refresh control
EMIF SDRAM extension
Reserved
0180 0014
0180 0018
0180 001C
0180 0020
0180 0024 − 0183 FFFF
Table 5. L2 Cache Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
0184 0000
ACRONYM
CCFG
REGISTER NAME
Cache configuration register
0184 4000
L2WBAR
L2WWC
L2WIBAR
L2WIWC
L1PIBAR
L1PIWC
L1DWIBAR
L1DWIWC
L2WB
L2 writeback base address register
0184 4004
L2 writeback word count register
0184 4010
L2 writeback-invalidate base address register
L2 writeback-invalidate word count register
L1P invalidate base address register
0184 4014
0184 4020
0184 4024
L1P invalidate word count register
0184 4030
L1D writeback-invalidate base address register
L1D writeback-invalidate word count register
L2 writeback all register
0184 4034
0184 5000
0184 5004
L2WBINV
MAR0
L2 writeback-invalidate all register
0184 8200
Controls CE0 range 8000 0000 − 80FF FFFF
Controls CE0 range 8100 0000 − 81FF FFFF
Controls CE0 range 8200 0000 − 82FF FFFF
Controls CE0 range 8300 0000 − 83FF FFFF
Controls CE1 range 9000 0000 − 90FF FFFF
Controls CE1 range 9100 0000 − 91FF FFFF
Controls CE1 range 9200 0000 − 92FF FFFF
Controls CE1 range 9300 0000 − 93FF FFFF
Controls CE2 range A000 0000 − A0FF FFFF
Controls CE2 range A100 0000 − A1FF FFFF
Controls CE2 range A200 0000 − A2FF FFFF
Controls CE2 range A300 0000 − A3FF FFFF
Controls CE3 range B000 0000 − B0FF FFFF
Controls CE3 range B100 0000 − B1FF FFFF
Controls CE3 range B200 0000 − B2FF FFFF
Controls CE3 range B300 0000 − B3FF FFFF
Reserved
0184 8204
MAR1
0184 8208
MAR2
0184 820C
0184 8240
MAR3
MAR4
0184 8244
MAR5
0184 8248
MAR6
0184 824C
0184 8280
MAR7
MAR8
0184 8284
MAR9
0184 8288
MAR10
MAR11
MAR12
MAR13
MAR14
MAR15
−
0184 828C
0184 82C0
0184 82C4
0184 82C8
0184 82CC
0184 82D0 − 0185 FFFF
18
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 6. Interrupt Selector Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Selects which interrupts drive CPU interrupts
10−15 (INT10−INT15)
019C 0000
MUXH
Interrupt multiplexer high
Interrupt multiplexer low
Selects which interrupts drive CPU interrupts 4−9
(INT04−INT09)
019C 0004
MUXL
Sets the polarity of the external interrupts
(EXT_INT4−EXT_INT7)
019C 0008
EXTPOL
−
External interrupt polarity
Reserved
019C 000C − 019F FFFF
Table 7. Device Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
019C 0200
ACRONYM
DEVCFG
−
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Allows the user to control peripheral selection.
This register also offers the user control of the
EMIF input clock source. For more detailed
information on the device configuration register, see
the Device Configurations section of this data
sheet.
Device Configuration
Reserved
019C 0204 − 019F FFFF
N/A
Identifies which CPU and defines the silicon
revision of the CPU. This register also offers the
user control of device operation.
For more detailed information on the CPU Control
Status Register, see the CPU CSR Register
Description section of this data sheet.
CSR
CPU Control Status Register
†
Table 8. EDMA Parameter RAM
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
01A0 0000 − 01A0 0017
01A0 0018 − 01A0 002F
01A0 0030 − 01A0 0047
01A0 0048 − 01A0 005F
01A0 0060 − 01A0 0077
01A0 0078 − 01A0 008F
01A0 0090 − 01A0 00A7
01A0 00A8 − 01A0 00BF
01A0 00C0 − 01A0 00D7
01A0 00D8 − 01A0 00EF
01A0 00F0 − 01A0 00107
01A0 0108 − 01A0 011F
01A0 0120 − 01A0 0137
01A0 0138 − 01A0 014F
01A0 0150 − 01A0 0167
01A0 0168 − 01A0 017F
01A0 0180 − 01A0 0197
01A0 0198 − 01A0 01AF
...
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Parameters for Event 0 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 1 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 2 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 3 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 4 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 5 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 6 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 7 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 8 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 9 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 10 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 11 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 12 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 13 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 14 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Parameters for Event 15 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
Reload/link parameters for Event 0−15
Reload/link parameters for Event 0−15
...
01A0 07E0 − 01A0 07F7
01A0 07F8 − 01A0 07FF
−
−
Reload/link parameters for Event 0−15
Scratch pad area (2 words)
†
The device has 85 EDMA parameters total: 16 Event/Reload parameters and 69 Reload-only parameters.
19
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
For more details on the EDMA parameter RAM 6-word parameter entry structure, see Figure 3.
31
0
EDMA Parameter
Word 0
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Word 5
EDMA Channel Options Parameter (OPT)
EDMA Channel Source Address (SRC)
OPT
SRC
CNT
DST
IDX
Array/Frame Count (FRMCNT)
Element Count (ELECNT)
EDMA Channel Destination Address (DST)
Array/Frame Index (FRMIDX)
Element Count Reload (ELERLD)
Element Index (ELEIDX)
Link Address (LINK)
RLD
Figure 3. EDMA Channel Parameter Entries (6 Words) for Each EDMA Event
Table 9. EDMA Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
01A0 0800 − 01A0 FEFC
01A0 FF00
ACRONYM
−
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
ESEL0
ESEL1
−
EDMA event selector 0
EDMA event selector 1
Reserved
01A0 FF04
01A0 FF08 − 01A0 FF0B
01A0 FF0C
ESEL3
−
EDMA event selector 3
Reserved
01A0 FF1F − 01A0 FFDC
01A0 FFE0
PQSR
CIPR
CIER
CCER
ER
Priority queue status register
Channel interrupt pending register
Channel interrupt enable register
Channel chain enable register
Event register
01A0 FFE4
01A0 FFE8
01A0 FFEC
01A0 FFF0
01A0 FFF4
EER
ECR
ESR
–
Event enable register
Event clear register
Event set register
01A0 FFF8
01A0 FFFC
01A1 0000 − 01A3 FFFF
Reserved
20
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
†
Table 10. Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
0200 0000
ACRONYM
QOPT
QSRC
QCNT
QDST
QIDX
REGISTER NAME
QDMA options parameter register
QDMA source address register
QDMA frame count register
QDMA destination address register
QDMA index register
0200 0004
0200 0008
0200 000C
0200 0010
0200 0014 − 0200 001C
0200 0020
−
Reserved
QSOPT
QSSRC
QSCNT
QSDST
QSIDX
QDMA pseudo options register
0200 0024
QDMA pseudo source address register
QDMA pseudo frame count register
QDMA pseudo destination address register
QDMA pseudo index register
0200 0028
0200 002C
0200 0030
†
All the QDMA and Pseudo registers are write-accessible only
Table 11. PLL Controller Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
01B7 C000
ACRONYM
PLLPID
−
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral identification register (PID) [0x00010801 for PLL Controller]
Reserved
01B7 C004 − 01B7 C0FF
01B7 C100
PLLCSR
−
PLL control/status register
Reserved
01B7 C104 − 01B7 C10F
01B7 C110
PLLM
PLL multiplier control register
PLL controller divider 0 register
PLL controller divider 1 register
PLL controller divider 2 register
PLL controller divider 3 register
Oscillator divider 1 register
Reserved
01B7 C114
PLLDIV0
PLLDIV1
PLLDIV2
PLLDIV3
OSCDIV1
−
01B7 C118
01B7 C11C
01B7 C120
01B7 C124
01B7 C128 − 01B7 DFFF
21
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 12. McASP0 and McASP1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
McASP0
McASP1
McASPx receive buffer or McASPx transmit buffer via the
Peripheral Data Bus.
(Used when RSEL or XSEL bits = 0 [these bits are located
in the RFMT or XFMT registers, respectively].)
3C00 0000 − 3C00 FFFF
3C10 0000 − 3C10 FFFF
RBUF/XBUFx
MCASPPIDx
Peripheral Identification register
[0x00100101 for McASP0 and for McASP1]
01B4 C000
01B5 0000
01B4 C004
01B4 C008
01B4 C00C
01B4 C010
01B4 C014
01B4 C018
01B5 0004
01B5 0008
01B5 000C
01B5 0010
01B5 0014
01B5 0018
PWRDEMUx
−
Power down and emulation management register
Reserved
−
Reserved
PFUNCx
PDIRx
PDOUTx
Pin function register
Pin direction register
Pin data out register
Pin data in / data set register
Read returns: PDIN
Writes affect: PDSET
01B4 C01C
01B5 001C
PDIN/PDSETx
01B4 C020
01B4 C024 − 01B4 C040
01B4 C044
01B5 0020
01B5 0024 − 01B5 0040
01B5 0044
PDCLRx
−
Pin data clear register
Reserved
GBLCTLx
AMUTEx
DLBCTLx
DITCTLx
−
Global control register
Mute control register
Digital Loop-back control register
DIT mode control register
Reserved
01B4 C048
01B5 0048
01B4 C04C
01B5 004C
01B4 C050
01B5 0050
01B4 C054 − 01B4 C05C
01B5 0054 − 01B5 005C
Alias of GBLCTL containing only Receiver Reset bits,
allows transmit to be reset independently from receive.
01B4 C060
01B5 0060
RGBLCTLx
01B4 C064
01B4 C068
01B5 0064
01B5 0068
RMASKx
RFMTx
Receiver format unit bit mask register
Receive bit stream format register
Receive frame sync control register
Receive clock control register
01B4 C06C
01B5 006C
AFSRCTLx
ACLKRCTLx
01B4 C070
01B5 0070
01B4 C074
01B5 0074
AHCLKRCTLx High-frequency receive clock control register
01B4 C078
01B5 0078
RTDMx
RINTCTLx
RSTATx
RSLOTx
RCLKCHKx
−
Receive TDM slot 0−31 register
Receiver interrupt control register
Status register − Receiver
Current receive TDM slot register
Receiver clock check control register
Reserved
01B4 C07C
01B5 007C
01B4 C080
01B5 0080
01B4 C084
01B5 0084
01B4 C088
01B5 0088
01B4 C08C − 01B4 C09C
01B5 008C − 01B5 009C
Alias of GBLCTL containing only Transmitter Reset bits,
allows transmit to be reset independently from receive.
01B4 C0A0
01B5 00A0
XGBLCTLx
01B4 C0A4
01B4 C0A8
01B4 C0AC
01B4 C0B0
01B4 C0B4
01B5 00A4
01B5 00A8
01B5 00AC
01B5 00B0
01B5 00B4
XMASKx
XFMTx
Transmit format unit bit mask register
Transmit bit stream format register
Transmit frame sync control register
Transmit clock control register
AFSXCTLx
ACLKXCTLx
AHCLKXCTLx High-frequency Transmit clock control register
22
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 12. McASP0 and McASP1 Registers (Continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
Transmit TDM slot 0−31 register
McASP0
01B4 C0B8
01B4 C0BC
01B4 C0C0
01B4 C0C4
01B4 C0C8
01B4 C0D0 − 01B4 C0FC
01B4 C100
McASP1
01B5 00B8
01B5 00BC
01B5 00C0
01B5 00C4
01B5 00C8
01B5 00CC − 01B5 00FC
01B5 0100
XTDMx
XINTCTLx
XSTATx
Transmit interrupt control register
Status register − Transmitter
XSLOTx
Current transmit TDM slot
XCLKCHKx
−
Transmit clock check control register
Reserved
DITCSRA0x
DITCSRA1x
DITCSRA2x
DITCSRA3x
DITCSRA4x
DITCSRA5x
DITCSRB0x
DITCSRB1x
DITCSRB2x
DITCSRB3x
DITCSRB4x
DITCSRB5x
DITUDRA0x
DITUDRA1x
DITUDRA2x
DITUDRA3x
DITUDRA4x
DITUDRA5x
DITUDRB0x
DITUDRB1x
DITUDRB2x
DITUDRB3x
DITUDRB4x
DITUDRB5x
−
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Left (even TDM slot) channel status register file
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
Right (odd TDM slot) channel status register file
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
Left (even TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Right (odd TDM slot) user data register file
Reserved
01B4 C104
01B5 0104
01B4 C108
01B5 0108
01B4 C10C
01B4 C110
01B5 010C
01B5 0110
01B4 C114
01B5 0114
01B4 C118
01B5 0118
01B4 C11C
01B4 C120
01B5 011C
01B5 0120
01B4 C124
01B5 0124
01B4 C128
01B5 0128
01B4 C12C
01B4 C130
01B5 012C
01B5 0130
01B4 C134
01B5 0134
01B4 C138
01B5 0138
01B4 C13C
01B4 C140
01B5 013C
01B5 0140
01B4 C144
01B5 0144
01B4 C148
01B5 0148
01B4 C14C
01B4 C150
01B5 014C
01B5 0150
01B4 C154
01B5 0154
01B4 C158
01B5 0158
01B4 C15C
01B4 C160 − 01B4 C17C
01B4 C180
01B5 015C
01B5 0160 − 01B5 017C
01B5 0180
SRCTL0x
SRCTL1x
SRCTL2x
SRCTL3x
SRCTL4x
SRCTL5x
SRCTL6x
SRCTL7x
−
Serializer 0 control register
01B4 C184
01B5 0184
Serializer 1 control register
01B4 C188
01B5 0188
Serializer 2 control register
01B4 C18C
01B4 C190
01B5 018C
01B5 0190
Serializer 3 control register
Serializer 4 control register
01B4 C194
01B5 0194
Serializer 5 control register
01B4 C198
01B5 0198
Serializer 6 control register
01B4 C19C
01B4 C1A0 − 01B4 C1FC
01B5 019C
01B5 01A0 − 01B5 01FC
Serializer 7 control register
Reserved
23
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 12. McASP0 and McASP1 Registers (Continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
McASP0
01B4 C200
McASP1
01B5 0200
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
XBUF0x
XBUF1x
XBUF2x
XBUF3x
XBUF4x
XBUF5x
XBUF6x
XBUF7x
−
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 0 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 1 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 2 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 3 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 4 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 5 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 6 through configuration bus
Transmit Buffer for Serializer 7 through configuration bus
Reserved
01B4 C204
01B5 0204
01B4 C208
01B5 0208
01B4 C20C
01B5 020C
01B4 C210
01B5 0210
01B4 C214
01B5 0214
01B4 C218
01B5 0218
01B4 C21C
01B5 021C
01B4 C220 − 01B4 C27C
01B4 C280
01B5 C220 − 01B5 027C
01B5 0280
‡
RBUF0x
RBUF1x
RBUF2x
RBUF3x
RBUF4x
RBUF5x
RBUF6x
RBUF7x
−
Receive Buffer for Serializer 0 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 1 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 2 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 3 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 4 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 5 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 6 through configuration bus
Receive Buffer for Serializer 7 through configuration bus
Reserved
‡
01B4 C284
01B5 0284
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
01B4 C288
01B5 0288
01B4 C28C
01B5 028C
01B4 C290
01B5 0290
01B4 C294
01B5 0294
01B4 C298
01B5 0298
01B4 C29C
01B5 029C
01B4 C2A0 − 01B4 FFFF
01B5 02A0 − 01B5 3FFF
†
‡
The transmit buffers for serializers 0 − 7 are accessible to the CPU via the peripheral bus if the XSEL bit = 1 (XFMT register).
The receive buffers for serializers 0 − 7 are accessible to the CPU via the peripheral bus if the RSEL bit = 1 (RFMT register).
Table 13. I2C0 and I2C1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
I2Cx own address register
I2C0
I2C1
01B4 0000
01B4 0004
01B4 0008
01B4 000C
01B4 0010
01B4 0014
01B4 0018
01B4 001C
01B4 0020
01B4 0024
01B4 0028
01B4 002C
01B4 0030
01B4 4000
01B4 4004
01B4 4008
01B4 400C
01B4 4010
01B4 4014
01B4 4018
01B4 401C
01B4 4020
01B4 4024
01B4 4028
01B4 402C
01B4 4030
I2COARx
I2CIERx
I2CSTRx
I2CCLKLx
I2CCLKHx
I2CCNTx
I2CDRRx
I2CSARx
I2CDXRx
I2CMDRx
I2CISRCx
−
I2Cx interrupt enable register
I2Cx interrupt status register
I2Cx clock low-time divider register
I2Cx clock high-time divider register
I2Cx data count register
I2Cx data receive register
I2Cx slave address register
I2Cx data transmit register
I2Cx mode register
I2Cx interrupt source register
Reserved
I2CPSCx
I2Cx prescaler register
I2CPID10
I2CPID11
I2Cx Peripheral Identification register 1
[0x0000 0103]
01B4 0034
01B4 4034
I2CPID20
I2CPID21
I2Cx Peripheral Identification register 2
[0x0000 0005]
01B4 0038
01B4 4038
01B4 003C − 01B4 3FFF
01B4 403C − 01B4 7FFF
−
Reserved
24
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 14. HPI Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
HPID
HPIA
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
−
HPI data register
Host read/write access only
Host read/write access only
Both Host/CPU read/write access
−
HPI address register
HPI control register
Reserved
0188 0000
HPIC
−
0188 0004 − 018B FFFF
Table 15. Timer 0 and Timer 1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
TIMER 0
TIMER 1
Determines the operating
mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the
function of the TOUT pin.
0194 0000
0194 0004
0198 0000
CTLx
Timer x control register
Timer x period register
Contains the number of timer
input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the
TSTAT signal frequency.
0198 0004
PRDx
Contains the current value of
the incrementing counter.
0194 0008
0198 0008
CNTx
−
Timer x counter register
Reserved
0194 000C − 0197 FFFF
0198 000C − 019B FFFF
−
Table 16. McBSP0 and McBSP1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
McBSP0
McBSP1
McBSPx data receive register via Configuration Bus
018C 0000
0190 0000
DRRx
The CPU and EDMA controller can only read this register;
they cannot write to it.
3000 0000 − 33FF FFFF
018C 0004
3400 0000 − 37FF FFFF
0190 0004
DRRx
DXRx
DXRx
SPCRx
RCRx
XCRx
SRGRx
MCRx
RCERx
XCERx
PCRx
−
McBSPx data receive register via Peripheral Data Bus
McBSPx data transmit register via Configuration Bus
McBSPx data transmit register via Peripheral Data Bus
McBSPx serial port control register
McBSPx receive control register
3000 0000 − 33FF FFFF
018C 0008
3400 0000 − 37FF FFFF
0190 0008
018C 000C
0190 000C
018C 0010
0190 0010
McBSPx transmit control register
018C 0014
0190 0014
McBSPx sample rate generator register
McBSPx multichannel control register
McBSPx receive channel enable register
McBSPx transmit channel enable register
McBSPx pin control register
018C 0018
0190 0018
018C 001C
0190 001C
018C 0020
0190 0020
018C 0024
0190 0024
018C 0028 − 018F FFFF
0190 0028 − 0193 FFFF
Reserved
25
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 17. GPIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
01B0 0000
ACRONYM
GPEN
GPDIR
GPVAL
−
REGISTER NAME
GPIO enable register
01B0 0004
GPIO direction register
GPIO value register
Reserved
01B0 0008
01B0 000C
01B0 0010
GPDH
GPHM
GPDL
GPLM
GPGC
GPPOL
−
GPIO delta high register
GPIO high mask register
GPIO delta low register
GPIO low mask register
GPIO global control register
GPIO interrupt polarity register
Reserved
01B0 0014
01B0 0018
01B0 001C
01B0 0020
01B0 0024
01B0 0028 − 01B0 3FFF
26
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
signal groups description
CLKIN
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
Clock/PLL
Oscillator
CLKOUT3
CLKMODE0
PLLHV
RESET
NMI
‡§
‡§
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
Reset and
Interrupts
TMS
TDO
‡§
‡§
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1
TDI
‡
HD4/GP[0]
TCK
IEEE Standard
1149.1
(JTAG)
Emulation
TRST
EMU0
EMU1
†
†
EMU2
EMU3
†
†
EMU4
EMU5
Control/Status
HPI
(Host-Port Interface)
HD15/GP[15]
HD14/GP[14]
HAS/ACLKX1
HR/W/AXR1[0]
HCS/AXR1[2]
HDS1/AXR1[6]
HDS2/AXR1[5]
HRDY/ACLKR1
HINT/GP[1]
HD13/GP[13]
HD12/GP[12]
HD11/GP[11]
HD10/GP[10]
Control
HD9/GP[9]
HD8/GP[8]
HD7/GP[3]
Data
HD6/AHCLKR1
HD5/AHCLKX1
HD4/GP[0]
HD3/AMUTE1
HD2/AFSX1
HCNTL0/AXR1[3]
HCNTL1/AXR1[1]
Register Select
HD1/AXR1[7]
HD0/AXR1[4]
Half-Word
Select
HHWIL/AFSR1
†
‡
These external pins are applicable to the GDP and ZDP packages only.
The GP[15:0] pins, through interrupt sharing, are external interrupt capable via GPINT0. For more details, see the External
Interrupt Sources section of this data sheet. For more details on interrupt sharing, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Interrupt Selector
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU646).
§
All of these pins are external interrupt sources. For more details, see the External Interrupt Sources section of this data sheet.
NOTE A: On multiplexed pins, bolded text denotes the active function of the pin for that particular peripheral module.
Figure 4. CPU (DSP Core) and Peripheral Signals
27
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
signal groups description (continued)
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1
HD7/GP[3]
HD15/GP[15]
HD14/GP[14]
HD13/GP[13]
HD12/GP[12]
HD11/GP[11]
HD10/GP[10]
HD9/GP[9]
†
GPIO
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
HINT/GP[1]
HD4/GP[0]
HD8/GP[8]
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
TINP1/AHCLKX0
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
TINP0/AXR0[3]
Timer 1
Timer 0
Timers
CLKS1/SCL1
DR1/SDA1
SCL0
SDA0
I2C1
I2C0
I2Cs
†
The GP[15:0] pins, through interrupt sharing, are external interrupt capable via GPINT0. GP[15:0] are also external EDMA event
source capable. For more details, see the External Interrupt Sources and External EDMA Event Sources sections of this data sheet.
NOTE A: On multiplexed pins, bolded text denotes the active function of the pin for that particular peripheral module.
Figure 5. Peripheral Signals
28
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
signal groups description (continued)
ECLKIN
ECLKOUT
16
†
ED[31:16]
Data
Memory
Control
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
16
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
ARDY
ED[15:0]
CE3
CE2
CE1
CE0
Memory Map
Space Select
HOLD
HOLDA
Bus
Arbitration
20
EA[21:2]
Address
BUSREQ
†
†
BE3
BE2
Byte Enables
BE1
BE0
EMIF
(External Memory Interface)
McBSP1
Transmit
McBSP0
Transmit
CLKX1/AMUTE0
FSX1
CLKX0/ACLKX0
FSX0/AFSX0
DX0/AXR0[1]
DX1/AXR0[5]
CLKR1/AXR0[6]
FSR1/AXR0[7]
DR1/SDA1
CLKR0/ACLKR0
FSR0/AFSR0
DR0/AXR0[0]
Receive
Clock
Receive
Clock
CLKS1/SCL1
CLKS0/AHCLKR0
McBSPs
(Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports)
†
These external pins are applicable to the GDP and ZDP packages only.
NOTE A: On multiplexed pins, bolded text denotes the active function of the pin for that particular peripheral module.
Figure 5. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
29
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
signal groups description (continued)
(Transmit/Receive Data Pins)
FSR1/AXR0[7]
CLKR1/AXR0[6]
DX1/AXR0[5]
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
TINP0/AXR0[3]
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
DX0/AXR0[1]
8-Serial Ports
Flexible
Partitioning
Tx, Rx, OFF
DR0/AXR0[0]
(Receive Bit Clock)
(Transmit Bit Clock)
CLKX0/ACLKX0
Transmit
Clock
Generator
Receive Clock
Generator
CLKR0/ACLKR0
CLKS0/AHCLKR0
TINP1/AHCLKX0
(Receive Master Clock)
(Transmit Master Clock)
Transmit
Clock Check
Circuit
Receive Clock
Check Circuit
Receive
Frame Sync
Transmit
Frame Sync
FSR0/AFSR0
FSX0/AFSX0
(Receive Frame Sync or
Left/Right Clock)
(Transmit Frame Sync or
Left/Right Clock)
CLKX1/AMUTE0
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0
Error Detect
(see Note A)
Auto Mute
Logic
McASP0
(Multichannel Audio Serial Port 0)
NOTES: A. The McASPs’ Error Detect function detects underruns, overruns, early/late frame syncs, DMA errors, and external mute input.
B. On multiplexed pins, bolded text denotes the active function of the pin for that particular peripheral module.
C. Bolded and italicized text within parentheses denotes the function of the pins in an audio system.
Figure 5. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
30
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
signal groups description (continued)
(Transmit/Receive Data Pins)
HD1/AXR1[7]
HDS1/AXR1[6]
HDS2/AXR1[5]
HD0/AXR1[4]
8-Serial Ports
Flexible
Partitioning
Tx, Rx, OFF
HCNTL0/AXR1[3]
HCS/AXR1[2]
HCNTL1/AXR1[1]
HR/W/AXR1[0]
(Receive Bit Clock)
(Transmit Bit Clock)
HAS/ACLKX1
Transmit
Clock
Generator
Receive Clock
Generator
HRDY/ACLKR1
HD6/AHCLKR1
HD5/AHCLKX1
(Receive Master Clock)
(Transmit Master Clock)
Transmit
Clock Check
Circuit
Receive Clock
Check Circuit
Receive
Frame Sync
Transmit
Frame Sync
HHWIL/AFSR1
HD2/AFSX1
(Receive Frame Sync or
Left/Right Clock)
(Transmit Frame Sync or
Left/Right Clock)
HD3/AMUTE1
Error Detect
(see Note A)
Auto Mute
Logic
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1
McASP1
(Multichannel Audio Serial Port 1)
NOTES: A. The McASPs’ Error Detect function detects underruns, overruns, early/late frame syncs, DMA errors, and external mute input.
B. On multiplexed pins, bolded text denotes the active function of the pin for that particular peripheral module.
C. Bolded and italicized text within parentheses denotes the function of the pins in an audio system.
Figure 5. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
31
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS
On the C6713B device, bootmode and certain device configurations/peripheral selections are determined at
device reset, while other device configurations/peripheral selections are software-configurable via the device
configurations register (DEVCFG) [address location 0x019C0200] after device reset.
device configurations at device reset
Table 18 describes the device configuration pins, which are set up via internal or external pullup/pulldown
resistors through the HPI data pins (HD[4:3], HD8, HD12), and CLKMODE0 pin. These configuration pins must
be in the desired state until reset is released.
For proper device operation, do not oppose the HD [13, 11:9, 7, 1, 0] pins with external pull−ups/pulldowns at
reset.
For more details on these device configuration pins, see the Terminal Functions table and the Debugging
Considerations section of this data sheet.
32
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
†
Table 18. Device Configurations Pins at Device Reset (HD[4:3], HD8, HD12, and CLKMODE0)
CONFIGURATION
PIN
PYP
GDP/ZDP
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
EMIF Big Endian mode correctness (EMIFBE)
For a C6713BGDP or C6713BZDP:
0
–
The EMIF data will always be presented on the ED[7:0] side of the
bus, regardless of the endianess mode (Little/Big Endian).
In Little Endian mode (HD8 =1), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will
be present on the ED[7:0] side of the bus.
1
−
In Big Endian mode (HD8 =0), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be
present on the ED[31:24] side of the bus [default].
‡
HD12
168
C15
For a C6713BPYP, when Big Endian mode is selected (LENDIAN = 0), for
proper device operation the EMIFBE pin must be externally pulled low.
This new functionality does not affect systems using the current default value
of HD12=1. For more detailed information on the big endian mode
correctness, see the EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness portion of this data
sheet.
Device Endian mode (LEND)
‡
HD8
160
B17
0
1
–
−
System operates in Big Endian mode
System operates in Little Endian mode (default)
Bootmode Configuration Pins (BOOTMODE)
00 – HPI boot/Emulation boot
01 – CE1 width 8-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings (default mode)
HD[4:3]
(BOOTMODE)
10 − CE1 width 16-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings
156, 154
C19, C20
‡
11 − CE1 width 32-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings
For more detailed information on these bootmode configurations, see the
bootmode section of this data sheet.
Clock generator input clock source select
0
1
–
−
Reserved. Do not use.
CLKIN square wave [default]
CLKMODE0
205
C4
This pin must be pulled to the correct level even after reset.
†
‡
All other HD pins (HD [15, 13, 11:9, 7:5, 2:0]) have pullups/pulldowns (IPUs or IPDs). For proper device operation, do not oppose the HD [13,
11:9, 7, 1, 0] pins with external pull−ups/pulldowns at reset; however, the HD[15, 6, 5, 2] pins can be opposed and driven during reset.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
33
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
peripheral pin selection at device reset
Some peripherals share the same pins (internally muxed) and are mutually exclusive (i.e., HPI, general-purpose
input/output pins GP[15:8, 3, 1, 0] and McASP1).
D
HPI, McASP1, and GPIO peripherals
The HPI_EN (HD14 pin) is latched at reset. This pin selects whether the HPI peripheral pins or McASP1
peripheral pins and GP[15:8, 3, 1, 0] pins are functionally enabled (see Table 19).
†
Table 19. HPI_EN (HD14 Pin) Peripheral Selection (HPI or McASP1, and Select GPIO Pins)
PERIPHERAL PIN
SELECTION
PERIPHERAL
PINS SELECTED
DESCRIPTION
HPI_EN
(HD14 Pin) [173, C14]
McASP1 and
GP[15:8,3,1,0]
HPI
HPI_EN = 0
HPI pins are disabled; McASP1 peripheral pins and GP[15:8, 3, 1,0] pins
are enabled. All multiplexed HPI/McASP1 and HPI/GPIO pins function as
McASP1 and GPIO pins, respectively. To use the GPIO pins, the
appropriate bits in the GPEN and GPDIR registers need to be
configured.
0
√
HPI_EN = 1
HPI pins are enabled; McASP1 peripheral pins and GP[15:8, 3, 1,0] pins
are disabled [default]. All multiplexed HPI/McASP1 and HPI/GPIO pins
function as HPI pins.
1
√
†
The HPI_EN (HD[14]) pin cannot be controlled via software.
34
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
peripheral selection/device configurations via the DEVCFG control register
The device configuration register (DEVCFG) allows the user to control the pin availability of the McBSP0,
McBSP1, McASP0, I2C1, and Timer peripherals. The DEVCFG register also offers the user control of the EMIF
input clock source and the timer output pins. For more detailed information on the DEVCFG register control bits,
see Table 20 and Table 21.
Table 20. Device Configuration Register (DEVCFG) [Address location: 0x019C0200 − 0x019C02FF]
31
15
16
†
Reserved
RW-0
4
5
3
2
1
0
†
Reserved
EKSRC
R/W-0
TOUT1SEL
R/W-0
TOUT0SEL
R/W-0
MCBSP0DIS MCBSP1DIS
R/W-0 R/W-0
RW-0
Legend: R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
†
Do not write non-zero values to these bit locations.
Table 21. Device Configuration (DEVCFG) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
31:5
Reserved
Reserved. Do not write non-zero values to these bit locations.
EMIF input clock source bit.
Determines which clock signal is used as the EMIF input clock.
4
3
EKSRC
0
1
=
=
SYSCLK3 (from the clock generator) is the EMIF input clock source (default)
ECLKIN external pin is the EMIF input clock source
Timer 1 output (TOUT1) pin function select bit.
Selects the pin function of the TOUT1/AXR0[4] external pin independent of the rest of the peripheral
selection bits in the DEVCFG register.
TOUT1SEL
0
1
=
=
The pin functions as a Timer 1 output (TOUT1) pin (default)
The pin functions as the McASP0 transmit/receive data pin 4 (AXR0[4]).
The Timer 1 module is still active.
Timer 0 output (TOUT0) pin function select bit.
Selects the pin function of the TOUT0/AXR0[2] external pin independent of the rest of the peripheral
selection bits in the DEVCFG register.
2
1
0
TOUT0SEL
MCBSP0DIS
MCBSP1DIS
0
1
=
=
The pin functions as a Timer 0 output (TOUT0) pin (default)
The pin functions as the McASP0 transmit/receive data pin 2 (AXR0[2]).
The Timer 0 module is still active.
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port 0 (McBSP0) disable bit.
Selects whether McBSP0 or the McASP0 multiplexed peripheral pins are enabled or disabled.
0
=
McBSP0 peripheral pins are enabled, McASP0 peripheral pins (AHCLKR0, ACLKR0,
ACLKX0, AXR0[0], AXR0[1], AFSR0, and AFSX0) are disabled (default).
[If the McASP0 data pins are available, the McASP0 peripheral is functional for DIT
mode only.]
1
=
McBSP0 peripheral pins are disabled, McASP0 peripheral pins (AHCLKR0, ACLKR0,
ACLKX0, AXR0[0], AXR0[1], AFSR0, and AFSX0) are enabled.
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port 1 (McBSP1) disable bit.
Selects whether McBSP1 or I2C1 and McASP0 multiplexed peripheral pins are enabled or disabled.
0
1
=
=
McBSP1 peripheral pins are enabled, I2C1 peripheral pins (SCL1 and SDA1) and McASP0
peripheral pins (AXR0[7:5] and AMUTE0) are disabled (default)
McBSP1 peripheral pins are disabled, I2C1 peripheral pins (SCL1 and SDA1) and McASP0
peripheral pins (AXR0[7:5] and AMUTE0) are enabled.
35
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
multiplexed pins
Multiplexed pins are pins that are shared by more than one peripheral and are internally multiplexed. Most of
these pins are configured by software via the device configuration register (DEVCFG), and the others
(specifically, the HPI pins) are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors only at reset. The muxed pins
that are configured by software can be programmed to switch functionalities at any time. The muxed pins that
are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors are mutually exclusive; only one peripheral has primary
control of the function of these pins after reset. Table 22 summarizes the peripheral pins affected by the HPI_EN
(HD14 pin) and DEVCFG register. Table 23 identifies the multiplexed pins on the device; shows the default
(primary) function and the default settings after reset; and describes the pins, registers, etc. necessary to
configure the specific multiplexed functions.
36
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
†
Table 22. Peripheral Pin Selection Matrix
SELECTION BITS
PERIPHERAL PINS AVAILABILITY
B
I
T
G
P
I
B
I
T
T
I
M
E
R
T
I
M
E
R
M
c
M
c
A
S
P
1
M
c
B
S
P
0
M
c
B
S
P
1
I
I
E
M
I
H
P
I
O
A
S
P
2
C
0
2
C
1
V
N
A
A
L
P
I
N
S
F
‡
M
U
E
E
0
0
1
AHCLKX1
AHCLKR1
ACLKX1
ACLKR1
AFSX1
GP[0:1],
GP[3],
GP[8:15]
Plus:
0
None
AFSR1
GP[2]
ctrl’d by
GP2EN
bit
HPI_EN
(boot config
pin)
AMUTE1
AXR1[0] to
AXR1[7]
NO
GP[0:1],
GP[3],
GP[8:15]
1
0
None
All
None
All
ACLKX0
ACLKR0
AFSX0
MCBSP0DIS
(DEVCFG bit)
1
AFSR0
None
AHCLKR0
AXR0[0]
AXR0[1]
NO
AMUTE0
AXR0[5]
AXR0[6]
AXR0[7]
0
1
None
All
All
MCBSP1DIS
(DEVCFG bit)
AMUTE0
AXR0[5]
AXR0[6]
AXR0[7]
None
NO
AXR0[2]
0
1
0
1
0
TOUT0
TOUT0SEL
(DEVCFG bit)
NO
TOUT0
AXR0[2]
NO
AXR0[4]
TOUT1
TOUT1SEL
(DEVCFG bit)
NO
AXR0[4]
TOUT1
ED[7:0];
HD8 = 1/0
HD12 (boot
config pin)
ED[7:0] side
§
[HD8 = 1 (Little)]
ED[31:24] side
[HD8 = 0 (Big)]
1
†
‡
Gray blocks indicate that the peripheral is not affected by the selection bit.
The McASP0 pins AXR0[3] and AHCLKX0 are shared with the timer input pins TINP0 and TINP1, respectively. See Table 23 for more detailed
information.
§
For more detailed information on endianness correction, see the EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness portion of this data sheet.
37
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 23. C6713B Device Multiplexed/Shared Pins
MULTIPLEXED PINS
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
DEFAULT SETTING
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
ZDP
NAME
PYP
When the CLKOUT2 pin is enabled,
the CLK2EN bit in the EMIF global
control register (GBLCTL) controls the
CLKOUT2 pin.
GP2EN = 0
CLK2EN = 0: CLKOUT2 held high
CLK2EN = 1: CLKOUT2 enabled
to clock [default]
(GPEN register bit)
GP[2] function disabled,
CLKOUT2 enabled
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
82
Y12 CLKOUT2
To use these software-configurable
GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP
Enable Register and the GPxDIR bits
in the GP Direction Register must be
properly configured.
GPxEN = 1:
GP[x] pin enabled
No Function
GPxDIR = 0: GP[x] pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1: GP[x] pin is an
output
GPxDIR = 0 (input)
GP5EN = 0 (disabled)
GP4EN = 0 (disabled)
[(GPEN register bits)
GP[x] function disabled]
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1
6
1
C1
C2
GP[5](EXT_INT5)
GP[4](EXT_INT4)
To use AMUTEIN0/1 pin function, the
GP[5]/GP[4] pins must be configured
as an input, the INEN bit set to 1, and
the polarity through the INPOL bit
selected in the associated McASP
AMUTE register.
CLKS0/AHCLKR0
DR0/AXR0[0]
DX0/AXR0[1]
FSR0/AFSR0
FSX0/AFSX0
CLKR0/ACLKR0
CLKX0/ACLKX0
CLKS1/SCL1
DR1/SDA1
28
27
20
24
21
19
16
8
K3
J1
By default, McBSP0 peripheral pins are
enabled upon reset (McASP0 pins are
disabled).
MCBSP0DIS = 0
H2
J3
(DEVCFG register bit)
McASP0 pins disabled,
McBSP0 pins enabled
McBSP0 pin function
To enable the McASP0 peripheral pins,
the MCBSP0DIS bit in the DEVCFG
register must be set to 1 (disabling the
McBSP0 peripheral pins).
H1
H3
G3
E1
M2
L2
By default, McBSP1 peripheral pins are
enabled upon reset (I2C1 and McASP0
pins are disabled).
37
32
38
36
33
MCBSP1DIS = 0
(DEVCFG register bit)
I2C1 and McASP0 pins
disabled, McBSP1 pins
enabled
DX1/AXR0[5]
FSR1/AXR0[7]
CLKR1/AXR0[6]
CLKX1/AMUTE0
McBSP1 pin function
To enable the I2C1 and McASP0
peripheral pins, the MCBSP1DIS bit in
the DEVCFG register must be set to 1
(disabling the McBSP1 peripheral pins).
M3
M1
L3
38
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 23. C6713B Device Multiplexed/Shared Pins (Continued)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
DEFAULT SETTING
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
ZDP
NAME
PYP
HINT/GP[1]
135
174
173
172
168
167
166
165
160
164
156
152
147
144
146
143
151
150
145
161
159
154
155
139
140
153
J20
B14
C14
A15
C15
A16
B16
C16
B17
A18
C19
D20
E20
G19
G18
G20
E19
F18
F20
C17
B18
C20
D18
H20
H19
E18
HD15/GP[15]
HD14/GP[14]
HD13/GP[13]
HD12/GP[12]
HD11/GP[11]
HD10/GP[10]
HD9/GP[9]
By default, the HPI peripheral pins are
enabled at reset. McASP1 peripheral
pins and eleven GPIO pins are
disabled.
To enable the McASP1 peripheral pins
and the eleven GPIO pins, an external
pulldown resistor must be provided on
the HD14 pin setting HPI_EN = 0 at
reset.
HD8/GP[8]
HD7/GP[3]
HD4/GP[0]
HD1/AXR1[7]
HD0/AXR1[4]
HCNTL1/AXR1[1]
HCNTL0/AXR1[3]
HR/W/AXR1[0]
HDS1/AXR1[6]
HDS2/AXR1[5]
HCS/AXR1[2]
HD6/AHCLKR1
HD5/AHCLKX1
HD3/AMUTE1
HD2/AFSX1
HPI_EN (HD14 pin) = 1
(HPI enabled)
To use these software-configurable
GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP
Enable Register and the GPxDIR bits in
the GP Direction Register must be
properly configured.
HPI pin function
McASP1 pins and eleven
GPIO pins are disabled.
GPxEN = 1:
GP[x] pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0: GP[x] pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1: GP[x] pin is an
output
McASP1 pin direction is controlled by
the PDIR[x] bits in the McASP1PDIR
register.
HHWIL/AFSR1
HRDY/ACLKR1
HAS/ACLKX1
By default, the Timer 0 input pin is
enabled (and a shared input until the
McASP0 peripheral forces an output).
McASP0PDIR = 0 input, = 1 output
Timer 0 input
function
McASP0PDIR = 0 (input)
[specifically AXR0[3] bit]
TINP0/AXR0[3]
17
G2
By default, the Timer 0 output pin is
enabled.
To enable the McASP0 AXR0[2] pin, the
TOUT0SEL bit in the DEVCFG register
must be set to 1 (disabling the Timer 0
peripheral output pin function).
TOUT0SEL = 0
(DEVCFG register bit)
[TOUT0 pin enabled and
McASP0 AXR0[2] pin
disabled]
Timer 0 output
function
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
18
G1
The AXR2 bit in the McASP0PDIR
register
controls
the
direction
(input/output) of the AXR0[2] pin
McASP0PDIR = 0 input, = 1 output
39
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 23. C6713B Device Multiplexed/Shared Pins (Continued)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
DEFAULT
FUNCTION
DEFAULT SETTING
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
ZDP
NAME
PYP
By default, the Timer 1 input and
McASP0 clock function are enabled as
inputs.
For the McASP0 clock to function as an
output:
Timer 1 input
function
McASP0PDIR = 0 (input)
[specifically AHCLKX bit]
TINP1/AHCLKX0
12
F2
McASP0PDIR = 1 (specifically the
AHCLKX bit]
By default, the Timer 1 output pin is
enabled.
To enable the McASP0 AXR0[4] pin, the
TOUT1SEL bit in the DEVCFG register
must be set to 1 (disabling the Timer 1
peripheral output pin function).
TOUT1SEL = 0
(DEVCFG register bit)
[TOUT1 pin enabled and
McASP0 AXR0[4] pin
disabled]
Timer 1 output
function
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
13
F1
The AXR4 bit in the McASP0PDIR
register
controls
the
direction
(input/output) of the AXR0[4] pin
McASP0PDIR = 0 input, = 1 output
configuration examples
Figure 6 through Figure 11 illustrate examples of peripheral selections that are configurable on this device.
40
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
configuration examples (continued)
ED [31:16],
ED[15:0]
32
20
CLKIN, CLKOUT3, CLKMODE0,
PLLHV, TMS, TDO, TDI, TCK,
TRST, EMU[5:3,1,0], RESET,
NMI
Clock,
System,
EMU, and
Reset
EMIF
EA[21:2]
CE[3:0], BE[3:0],
HOLDA, HOLD,
BUSREQ, ECLKIN,
ECLKOUT,
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS,
AWE/SDWE/SSWE,
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE,
ARDY
GP[15:8, 3:1]
GPIO
and
EXT_INT
GP[0],
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1,
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0,
GP[6](EXT_INT6),
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
HPI
I2C0
SCL0, SDA0
AFSX1, AFSR1, ACLKX1,
ACLKR1, AHCLKR1,
AHCLKX1, AMUTE1
SCL1, SDA1
I2C1
McASP1
McASP0
8
8
AXR1[7:0]
AXR0[7:0]
{TINP0/AXR0[3]}
McBSP1
AMUTE0,
TINP1/AHCLKX0,
AHCLKR0,
ACLKR0,
ACLKX0, AFSR0,
AFSX0
TIMER0
TIMER1
McBSP0
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
DEVCFG Register Value:
0x0000 000F
HPI_EN(HD14) = 0
GP2EN BIT = 1 (enabling GPEN.[2])
MCBSP0DIS = 1
MCBSP1DIS = 1
TOUT0SEL = 1
TOUT1SEL = 1
EKSRC = 0
Figure 6. Configuration Example A (2 I2C + 2 McASP + GPIO)
41
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
configuration examples (continued)
32
20
ED [31:16],
ED[15:0]
CLKIN, CLKOUT3, CLKMODE0,
PLLHV, TMS, TDO, TDI, TCK,
TRST, EMU[5:3,1,0], RESET,
NMI
Clock,
System,
EMU, and
Reset
EA[21:2]
EMIF
CE[3:0], BE[3:0],
HOLDA, HOLD,
BUSREQ, ECLKIN,
ECLKOUT,
GP[15:8, 3:1]
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS,
AWE/SDWE/SSWE,
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE,
ARDY
GPIO
and
EXT_INT
GP[0],
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1,
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0,
GP[6](EXT_INT6),
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
HPI
I2C0
SCL0, SDA0
AFSX1, AFSR1, ACLKX1,
ACLKR1, AHCLKR1,
AHCLKX1, AMUTE1
I2C1
McASP1
McASP0
8
5
AXR1[7:0]
AXR0[4:0]
{TINP0/AXR0[3]}
DR1, CLKS1,
CLKR1, CLKX1,
FSR1, DX1,
FSX1
McBSP1
TINP1/AHCLKX0,
AHCLKR0,
ACLKR0,
ACLKX0, AFSR0,
AFSX0
TIMER0
TIMER1
McBSP0
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
DEVCFG Register Value:
0x0000 000E
HPI_EN(HD14) = 0
GP2EN BIT = 1 (enabling GPEN.[2])
MCBSP0DIS = 1
MCBSP1DIS = 0
TOUT0SEL = 1
TOUT1SEL = 1
EKSRC = 0
Figure 7. Configuration Example B (1 I2C + 1 McBSP + 2 McASP + GPIO)
42
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
configuration examples (continued)
32
20
ED [31:16],
ED[15:0]
CLKIN, CLKOUT3, CLKMODE0,
PLLHV, TMS, TDO, TDI, TCK,
TRST, EMU[5:3,1,0], RESET,
NMI
Clock,
System,
EMU, and
Reset
EA[21:2]
EMIF
CE[3:0], BE[3:0],
HOLDA, HOLD,
BUSREQ, ECLKIN,
ECLKOUT,
GP[15:8, 3:1]
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS,
AWE/SDWE/SSWE,
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE,
ARDY
GPIO
and
EXT_INT
GP[0],
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1,
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0,
GP[6](EXT_INT6),
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
HPI
I2C0
SCL0, SDA0
AFSX1, AFSR1, ACLKX1,
ACLKR1, AHCLKR1,
AHCLKX1, AMUTE1
SCL1, SDA1
I2C1
McASP1
8
6
AXR1[7:0]
AXR0[7:2]
{TINP0/AXR0[3]}
McASP0
McBSP1
(DIT Mode)
AMUTE0,
TINP1/AHCLKX0
TIMER0
TIMER1
McBSP0
DR0, CLKS0,
CLKR0, CLKX0,
FSR0, DX0,
FSX0
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
DEVCFG Register Value:
0x0000 000D
HPI_EN(HD14) = 0
GP2EN BIT = 1 (enabling GPEN.[2])
MCBSP0DIS = 0
MCBSP1DIS = 1
TOUT0SEL = 1
TOUT1SEL = 1
EKSRC = 0
Figure 8. Configuration Example C [2 I2C + 1 McBSP + 1 McASP + 1 McASP (DIT) + GPIO]
43
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
configuration examples (continued)
32
20
ED [31:16],
ED[15:0]
CLKIN, CLKOUT3, CLKMODE0,
PLLHV, TMS, TDO, TDI, TCK,
TRST, EMU[5:3,1,0], RESET,
NMI
Clock,
System,
EMU, and
Reset
EA[21:2]
EMIF
CE[3:0], BE[3:0],
HOLDA, HOLD,
BUSREQ, ECLKIN,
ECLKOUT,
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS,
AWE/SDWE/SSWE,
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE,
ARDY
GP[15:8, 3:1]
GPIO
and
EXT_INT
GP[0],
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1,
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0,
GP[6](EXT_INT6),
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
HPI
I2C0
SCL0, SDA0
AFSX1, AFSR1, ACLKX1,
ACLKR1, AHCLKR1,
AHCLKX1, AMUTE1
I2C1
McASP1
8
3
AXR1[7:0]
AXR0[4:2]
{TINP0/AXR0[3]}
McASP0
McBSP1
(DIT Mode)
DR1, CLKS1,
CLKR1, CLKX1,
FSR1, DX1,
FSX1
TINP1/AHCLKX0
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
TIMER0
TIMER1
McBSP0
DR0, CLKS0,
CLKR0, CLKX0,
FSR0, DX0,
FSX0
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
DEVCFG Register Value:
0x0000 000C
HPI_EN(HD14) = 0
GP2EN BIT = 1 (enabling GPEN.[2])
MCBSP0DIS = 0
MCBSP1DIS = 0
TOUT0SEL = 1
TOUT1SEL = 1
EKSRC = 0
Figure 9. Configuration Example D [1 I2C + 2 McBSP + 1 McASP + 1 McASP (DIT) + GPIO + Timers]
44
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
configuration examples (continued)
32
20
CLKIN, CLKOUT3, CLKMODE0,
PLLHV, TMS, TDO, TDI, TCK,
TRST, EMU[5:3,1,0], RESET,
NMI
ED [31:16],
ED[15:0]
Clock,
System,
EMU, and
Reset
EA[21:2]
EMIF
CE[3:0], BE[3:0],
HOLDA, HOLD,
BUSREQ, ECLKIN,
ECLKOUT,
CLKOUT2
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS,
AWE/SDWE/SSWE,
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE,
ARDY
GPIO
and
EXT_INT
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1,
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0,
GP[6](EXT_INT6),
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
16
HD[15:0]
HPI
I2C0
SCL0, SDA0
HINT, HHWIL,
HRDY, HR/W,
HCNTRL1,
HCNTRL0, HCS,
HDS2, HDS1,
HAS
I2C1
McASP1
McASP0
SCL1, SDA1
8
AXR0[7:0],
{TINP0/AXR0[3]}
McBSP1
AMUTE0,
TINP1/AHCLKX0,
AHCLKR0,
ACLKR0,
ACLKX0, AFSR0,
AFSX0
TIMER0
TIMER1
McBSP0
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
DEVCFG Register Value:
0x0000 000F
HPI_EN(HD14) = 1
GP2EN BIT = 0 (enabling GPEN.[2])
MCBSP0DIS = 1
MCBSP1DIS = 1
TOUT0SEL = 1
TOUT1SEL = 1
EKSRC = 0
Figure 10. Configuration Example E (1 I2C + HPI + 1 McASP)
45
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
configuration examples (continued)
32
20
CLKIN, CLKOUT3, CLKMODE0,
PLLHV, TMS, TDO, TDI, TCK,
TRST, EMU[5:3,1,0], RESET,
NMI
ED [31:16],
ED[15:0]
Clock,
System,
EMU, and
Reset
EA[21:2]
EMIF
CE[3:0], BE[3:0],
HOLDA, HOLD,
BUSREQ, ECLKIN,
ECLKOUT,
CLKOUT2
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS,
AWE/SDWE/SSWE,
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE,
ARDY
GPIO
and
EXT_INT
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1,
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0,
GP[6](EXT_INT6),
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
16
HD[15:0]
I2C0
HPI
SCL0, SDA0
HINT, HHWIL,
HRDY, HR/W,
HCNTRL1,
HCNTRL0, HCS,
HDS2, HDS1,
HAS
I2C1
McASP1
McASP0
5
AXR0[4:0]
{TINP0/AXR0[3]}
DR1, CLKS1,
CLKR1, CLKX1,
FSR1, DX1,
FSX1
McBSP1
TINP1/AHCLKX0,
AHCLKR0,
ACLKR0,
ACLKX0, AFSR0,
AFSX0
TIMER0
TIMER1
McBSP0
Shading denotes a peripheral module not available for this configuration.
DEVCFG Register Value:
0x0000 000E
HPI_EN(HD14) = 1
GP2EN BIT = 0 (enabling GPEN.[2])
MCBSP0DIS = 1
MCBSP1DIS = 0
TOUT0SEL = 1
TOUT1SEL = 1
EKSRC = 0
Figure 11. Configuration Example F (1 McBSP + HPI + 1 McASP)
46
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
debugging considerations
It is recommended that external connections be provided to peripheral selection/device configuration pins,
including HD[14, 8, 12, 4, 3], and CLKMODE0. Although internal pullup resistors exist on these pins, providing
external connectivity adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes.
Internal pullup/pulldown resistors also exist on the non-configuration pins on the HPI data bus and HD[15, 13,
11:9, 7:5, 2:0]. For proper device operation, do not oppose the HD [13, 11:9, 7, 1, 0] pins with external
pull−ups/pulldowns at reset. If an external controller provides signals to these HD[13, 11:9, 7, 1, 0]
non-configuration pins, these signals must be driven to the default state of the pins at reset, or not be driven
at all. For a list of routed out, 3-stated, or not-driven pins recommended for external pullup/pulldown resistors,
and internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, etc., see the Terminal Functions table. However, the
HD[15, 6, 5, 2] non-configuration pins can be opposed and driven during reset.
47
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
TERMINAL FUNCTIONS
The terminal functions table identifies the external signal names, the associated pin (ball) numbers along with
the mechanical package designator, the pin type (I, O/Z, or I/O/Z), whether the pin has any internal
pullup/pulldown resistors and a functional pin description. For more detailed information on device
configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging considerations, see the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet.
Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
IPU‡
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
CLOCK/PLL CONFIGURATION
CLKIN
204
82
A3
I
IPD
IPD
IPD
Clock Input
Clock output at half of device speed (O/Z) [default] (SYSCLK2 internal signal
from the clock generator) or this pin can be programmed as GP[2] pin (I/O/Z)
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
CLKOUT3
Y12
D10
O/Z
O
184
Clock output programmable by OSCDIV1 register in the PLL controller.
Clock generator input clock source select
0
1
−
–
Reserved, do not use.
CLKIN square wave [default]
CLKMODE0
PLLHV
205
202
C4
C5
I
IPU
For proper device operation, this pin must be either left unconnected or
externally pulled up with a 1-kΩ resistor.
A
Analog power (3.3 V) for PLL (PLL Filter)
JTAG EMULATION
TMS
TDO
TDI
192
187
191
193
B7
A8
A7
A6
I
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
JTAG test-port mode select
JTAG test-port data out
O/Z
I
I
JTAG test-port data in
TCK
JTAG test-port clock
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet.
§
TRST
197
B6
I
IPD
EMU5
EMU4
EMU3
EMU2
—
—
—
—
B12
C11
B10
D3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
Emulation pin 5. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
Emulation pin 4. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
Emulation pin 3. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
Emulation pin 2. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
Emulation [1:0] pins
•
Select the device functional mode of operation
EMU[1:0]
Operation
00
01
10
11
Boundary Scan/Functional Mode (see Note)
Reserved
Reserved
Emulation/Functional Mode [default] (see the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet)
EMU1
EMU0
185
186
B9
D9
I/O/Z
IPU
The DSP can be placed in Functional mode when the EMU[1:0] pins are
configured for either Boundary Scan or Emulation.
Note: When the EMU[1:0] pins are configured for Boundary Scan mode, the
internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST signal must not be opposed in order to
operate in Functional mode.
For the Boundary Scan mode drive EMU[1:0] and RESET pins low.
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
§
To ensure a proper logic level during reset when these pins are both routed out and 3−stated or not driven, it is recommended to include an
external 10 kΩ pullup/pulldown resistor to sustain the IPU/IPD, respectively.
48
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
IPU‡
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
RESETS AND INTERRUPTS
Device reset. When using Boundary Scan mode, drive the EMU[1:0] and
RESET pins low. For this device, this pin does not have an IPU.
RESET
176
A13
I
I
—
Nonmaskable interrupt
•
Edge-driven (rising edge)
Any noise on the NMI pin may trigger an NMI interrupt; therefore, if the NMI pin is
not used, it is recommended that the NMI pin be grounded versus relying on the
IPD.
NMI
175
C13
IPD
General-purpose input/output pins (I/O/Z) which also function as external
interrupts
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
7
2
E3
D2
•
•
Edge-driven
Polarity independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register
bits (EXTPOL.[3:0]), in addition to the GPIO registers.
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/
AMUTEIN0
I/O/Z
IPU
6
1
C1
C2
GP[4] and GP[5] pins also function as AMUTEIN1 McASP1 mute input and
AMUTEIN0 McASP0 mute input, respectively, if enabled by the INEN bit in the
associated McASP AMUTE register.
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/
AMUTEIN1
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI)
Host interrupt (from DSP to host) (O) [default] or this pin can be programmed as
a GP[1] pin (I/O/Z).
HINT/GP[1]
135
144
146
J20
G19
G18
O/Z
IPU
IPU
IPU
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or
McASP1 data pin 1 (I/O/Z).
HCNTL1/AXR1[1]
HCNTL0/AXR1[3]
I
I
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or
McASP1 data pin 3 (I/O/Z).
Host half-word select − first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low
order) (I) [default] or McASP1 receive frame sync or left/right clock (LRCLK)
(I/O/Z).
HHWIL/AFSR1
HR/W/AXR1[0]
139
143
H20
G20
I
I
IPU
IPU
Host read or write select (I) [default] or McASP1 data pin 0 (I/O/Z).
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
49
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GDP/
IPD/
IPU‡
†
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
PYP
174
173
172
168
167
166
165
160
164
ZDP
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) (CONTINUED)
Host-port data pins (I/O/Z) [default] or general-purpose input/output pins
(I/O/Z)
HD15/GP[15]
B14
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
•
•
Used for transfer of data, address, and control
Also controls initialization of DSP modes at reset via pullup/pulldown
resistors
− Device Endian Mode (HD8)
§
HD14/GP[14]
HD13/GP[13]
HD12/GP[12]
HD11/GP[11]
HD10/GP[10]
HD9/GP[9]
C14
A15
C15
A16
B16
C16
B17
A18
0
1
–
−
Big Endian
Little Endian
For a C6713BGDP or C6713BZDP:
− Big Endian Mode Correctness EMIFBE (HD12)
§
§
0
–
The EMIF data will always be presented on the ED[7:0] side of the
bus, regardless of the endianess mode (Little/Big Endian).
In Little Endian mode (HD8 =1), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be
present on the ED[7:0] side of the bus.
In Big Endian mode (HD8 =0), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be
present on the ED[31:24] side of the bus [default].
1
−
For a C6713BPYP, when Big Endian mode is selected (LENDIAN = 0), for
proper device operation the EMIFBE pin must be externally pulled low.
This new functionality does not affect systems using the current default value of
HD12=1. For more detailed information on the big endian mode correctness,
see the EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness portion of this data
sheet.
I/O/Z
− Bootmode (HD[4:3])
00 – HPI boot/Emulation boot
01 – CE1 width 8-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings (default mode)
10 − CE1 width 16-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings
11 − CE1 width 32-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings
− HPI_EN (HD14)
0
1
§
HD8/GP[8]
–
−
HPI disabled, McASP1 enabled
HPI enabled, McASP1 disabled (default)
Other HD pins HD [13, 11:9, 7:5, 2:0] have pullups/pulldowns (IPUs/IPDs). For
proper device operation, do not oppose the HD [13, 11:9, 7, 1, 0] pins with exter-
nal pull−ups/pulldowns at reset; however, the HD[15, 6, 5, 2] pins can be op-
posed and driven at reset. For more details, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet.
HD7/GP[3]
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
§
To ensure a proper logic level during reset when these pins are both routed out and 3−stated or not driven, it is recommended to include an
external 10 kΩ pullup/pulldown resistor to sustain the IPU/IPD, respectively.
50
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
IPU‡
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) (CONTINUED)
Host-port data pin 6 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 receive high-frequency master
clock (I/O/Z).
HD6/AHCLKR1
HD5/AHCLKX1
161
159
C17
B18
IPU
IPU
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
Host-port data pin 5 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 transmit high-frequency master
clock (I/O/Z).
Host-port data pin 4 (I/O/Z) [ default] or this pin can be programmed as a GP[0]
pin (I/O/Z).
§
HD4/GP[0]
156
154
155
C19
C20
D18
IPD
IPU
IPU
§
HD3/AMUTE1
Host-port data pin 3 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 mute output (O/Z).
Host-port data pin 2 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 transmit frame sync or left/right
clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
HD2/AFSX1
I/O/Z
HD1/AXR1[7]
HD0/AXR1[4]
HAS/ACLKX1
HCS/AXR1[2]
152
147
153
145
151
150
140
D20
E20
E18
F20
E19
F18
H19
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPD
Host-port data pin 1 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 data pin 7 (I/O/Z).
Host-port data pin 0 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 data pin 4 (I/O/Z).
Host address strobe (I) [default] or McASP1 transmit bit clock (I/O/Z).
Host chip select (I) [default] or McASP1 data pin 2 (I/O/Z).
I/O/Z
I
I
HDS1/AXR1[6]
HDS2/AXR1[5]
HRDY/ACLKR1
I
I
Host data strobe 1 (I) [default] or McASP1 data pin 6 (I/O/Z).
Host data strobe 2 (I) [default] or McASP1 data pin 5 (I/O/Z) .
Host ready (from DSP to host) (O) [default] or McASP1 receive bit clock (I/O/Z).
O/Z
¶
EMIF − COMMON SIGNALS TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY
CE3
CE2
CE1
CE0
BE3
BE2
BE1
BE0
57
61
V6
W6
W18
V17
V5
O/Z
O/Z
O/Z
O/Z
O/Z
O/Z
O/Z
O/Z
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
Memory space enables
•
•
Enabled by bits 28 through 31 of the word address
Only one asserted during any external data access
103
102
—
Byte-enable control
—
Y4
•
•
•
Decoded from the two lowest bits of the internal address
Byte-write enables for most types of memory
Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)
108
110
U19
V20
¶
EMIF − BUS ARBITRATION
HOLDA
HOLD
137
138
136
J18
J17
J19
O/Z
I
IPU
IPU
IPU
Hold-request-acknowledge to the host
Hold request from the host
Bus request output
BUSREQ
O/Z
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
To ensure a proper logic level during reset when these pins are both routed out and 3−stated or not driven, it is recommended to include an
external 10 kΩ pullup/pulldown resistor to sustain the IPU/IPD, respectively.
§
¶
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
51
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
†
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
ZDP
‡
IPU
PYP
¶
EMIF − ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL
ECLKIN
78
Y11
I
IPD
External EMIF input clock source
EMIF output clock depends on the EKSRC bit (DEVCFG.[4]) and on EKEN bit
(GBLCTL.[5]).
EKSRC = 0
–
ECLKOUT is based on the internal SYSCLK3 signal
from the clock generator (default).
ECLKOUT
77
Y10
O/Z
IPD
EKSRC = 1
–
ECLKOUT is based on the the external EMIF input clock
source pin (ECLKIN)
EKEN = 0
EKEN = 1
–
–
ECLKOUT held low
ECLKOUT enabled to clock (default)
ARE/SDCAS/
SSADS
Asynchronous memory read enable/SDRAM column-address strobe/SBSRAM
address strobe
79
75
V11
O/Z
O/Z
IPU
IPU
AOE/SDRAS/
SSOE
Asynchronous memory output enable/SDRAM row-address strobe/SBSRAM
output enable
W10
AWE/SDWE/
SSWE
Asynchronous memory write enable/SDRAM write enable/SBSRAM write
enable
83
56
V12
Y5
O/Z
I
IPU
IPU
ARDY
Asynchronous memory ready input
¶
EMIF − ADDRESS
EA21
EA20
EA19
EA18
EA17
109
101
100
95
U18
Y18
W17
Y16
V16
99
EA16
EA15
EA14
EA13
EA12
EA11
EA10
EA9
92
94
90
91
93
86
76
74
71
70
69
68
64
63
62
Y15
W15
Y14
W14
V14
W13
V10
Y9
EMIF external address
Note: EMIF address numbering for the C6713BPYP device
starts with EA2 to maintain signal name compatibility with other C671x devices
(e.g., C6711, C6713BGDP and C6713BZDP) [see the 32-bit EMIF addressing
scheme in the TMS320C6000 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF)
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU266)].
O/Z
IPU
EA8
V9
EA7
Y8
EA6
W8
V8
EA5
EA4
W7
V7
EA3
EA2
Y6
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
¶
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
52
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
†
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
IPU‡
PYP
ZDP
¶
EMIF − DATA
ED31
ED30
ED29
ED28
ED27
ED26
ED25
ED24
ED23
ED22
ED21
ED20
ED19
ED18
ED17
ED16
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
—
—
N3
P3
—
P2
—
P1
—
R2
—
R3
—
T2
—
T1
—
U3
—
U1
—
U2
—
V1
—
V2
—
Y3
—
W4
V4
—
I/O/Z
IPU
External data pins (ED[31:16] pins applicable to GDP and ZDP packages only)
112
113
111
118
117
120
119
123
122
121
128
127
129
130
131
132
T19
T20
T18
R20
R19
P20
P18
N20
N19
N18
M20
M19
L19
L18
K19
K18
ED8
ED7
ED6
ED5
ED4
ED3
ED2
ED1
ED0
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
¶
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
53
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
IPD/
†
SIGNAL
PIN NO.
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
IPU‡
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT 1 (McASP1)
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/
AMUTEIN1
General-purpose input/output pin 4 and external interrupt 4 (I/O/Z) [default] or
McASP1 mute input (I/O/Z).
1
C2
I/O/Z
IPU
HD3/AMUTE1
154
140
C20
H19
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPU
IPD
Host-port data pin 3 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 mute output (O/Z).
HRDY/ACLKR1
Host ready (from DSP to host) (O) [default] or McASP1 receive bit clock (I/O/Z).
Host-port data pin 6 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 receive high-frequency master
clock (I/O/Z).
HD6/AHCLKR1
HAS/ACLKX1
HD5/AHCLKX1
161
153
159
C17
E18
B18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPU
IPU
IPU
Host address strobe (I) [default] or McASP 1 transmit bit clock (I/O/Z).
Host-port data pin 5 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 transmit high-frequency
master clock (I/O/Z).
Host half-word select − first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low
order) (I) [default] or McASP1 receive frame sync or left/right clock (LRCLK)
(I/O/Z).
HHWIL/AFSR1
139
H20
I/O/Z
IPU
Host-port data pin 2 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 transmit frame sync or left/
right clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
HD2/AFSX1
155
D18
I/O/Z
IPU
HD1/AXR1[7]
HDS1/AXR1[6]
HDS2/AXR1[5]
HD0/AXR1[4]
152
151
150
147
D20
E19
F18
E20
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
Host-port data pin 1 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 TX/RX data pin 7 (I/O/Z).
Host data strobe 1 (I) [default] or McASP1 TX/RX data pin 6 (I/O/Z).
Host data strobe 2 (I) [default] or McASP1 TX/RX data pin 5 (I/O/Z).
Host-port data pin 0 (I/O/Z) [ default] or McASP1 TX/RX data pin 4 (I/O/Z).
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or
McASP1 TX/RX data pin 3 (I/O/Z).
HCNTL0/AXR1[3]
HCS/AXR1[2]
146
145
144
143
G18
F20
G19
G20
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
Host chip select (I) [default] or McASP1 TX/RX data pin 2 (I/O/Z).
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or
McASP1 TX/RX data pin 1 (I/O/Z).
HCNTL1/AXR1[1]
HR/W/AXR1[0]
Host read or write select (I) [default] or McASP1 TX/RX data pin 0 (I/O/Z).
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT 0 (McASP0)
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/
AMUTEIN0
General-purpose input/output pin 5 and external interrupt 5 (I/O/Z) [default] or
McASP0 mute input (I/O/Z).
6
C1
I/O/Z
IPU
CLKX1/AMUTE0
CLKR0/ACLKR0
33
19
L3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
IPD
McBSP1 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 mute output (O/Z).
McBSP0 receive clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 receive bit clock (I/O/Z).
H3
Timer 1 input (I) or McASP0 transmit high−frequency master clock (I/O/Z). This
pin defaults as Timer 1 input (I) and McASP transmit high−frequency master
clock input (I).
TINP1/AHCLKX0
12
F2
I/O/Z
IPD
CLKX0/ACLKX0
16
28
G3
K3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
IPD
McBSP0 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 transmit bit clock (I/O/Z).
McBSP0 external clock source (as opposed to internal) (I) [default] or McASP0
receive high-frequency master clock (I/O/Z).
CLKS0/AHCLKR0
McBSP0 receive frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 receive frame sync or
left/right clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
FSR0/AFSR0
FSX0/AFSX0
FSR1/AXR0[7]
24
21
38
J3
H1
M3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
IPD
IPD
McBSP0 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 transmit frame sync
or left/right clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
McBSP1 receive frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 7
(I/O/Z).
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
54
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
†
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
ZDP
IPU‡
PYP
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT 0 (McASP0) (CONTINUED)
CLKR1/AXR0[6]
DX1/AXR0[5]
36
32
13
17
18
20
27
M1
L2
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
IPU
IPD
IPD
IPD
IPU
IPU
McBSP1 receive clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 6 (I/O/Z).
McBSP1 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 5 (I/O/Z).
Timer 1 output (O) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 4 (I/O/Z).
Timer 0 input (I) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 3 (I/O/Z).
Timer 0 output (O) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 2 (I/O/Z).
McBSP0 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 1 (I/O/Z).
McBSP0 receive data (I) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 0 (I/O/Z).
TIMER 1
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
TINP0/AXR0[3]
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
DX0/AXR0[1]
F1
G2
G1
H2
J1
DR0/AXR0[0]
TOUT1/AXR0[4]
TINP1/AHCLKX0
13
12
F1
F2
O
I
IPD
IPD
Timer 1 output (O) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 4 (I/O/Z).
Timer 1 input (I) or McASP0 transmit high−frequency master clock (I/O/Z). This
pin defaults as Timer 1 input (I) and McASP transmit high−frequency master
clock input (I).
TIMER0
TOUT0/AXR0[2]
TINP0/AXR0[3]
18
17
G1
G2
O
I
IPD
IPD
Timer 0 output (O) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 2 (I/O/Z).
Timer 0 input (I) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 3 (I/O/Z).
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1)
McBSP1 external clock source (as opposed to internal) (I) [default] or I2C1
clock (I/O/Z).
This pin does not have an internal pullup or pulldown. When this pin is used as a
McBSP pin, this pin should either be driven externally at all times or be pulled up
with a 10-kΩ resistor to a valid logic level. Because it is common for some ICs to
3-state their outputs at times, a 10-kΩ pullup resistor may be desirable even
when an external device is driving the pin.
CLKS1/SCL1
8
E1
I
—
CLKR1/AXR0[6]
CLKX1/AMUTE0
36
33
M1
L3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
IPD
McBSP1 receive clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 6 (I/O/Z).
McBSP1 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 mute output (O/Z).
McBSP1 receive data (I) [default] or I2C1 data (I/O/Z).
This pin does not have an internal pullup or pulldown. When this pin is used as a
McBSP pin, this pin should either be driven externally at all times or be pulled up
with a 10-kΩ resistor to a valid logic level. Because it is common for some ICs to
3-state their outputs at times, a 10-kΩ pullup resistor may be desirable even
when an external device is driving the pin.
DR1/SDA1
37
M2
I
—
DX1/AXR0[5]
FSR1/AXR0[7]
FSX1
32
38
31
L2
M3
L1
O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPU
IPD
IPD
McBSP1 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 5 (I/O/Z).
McBSP1 receive frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 7
(I/O/Z).
McBSP1 transmit frame sync
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
55
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
IPU‡
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 0 (McBSP0)
McBSP0 external clock source (as opposed to internal) (I) [default] or McASP0
receive high-frequency master clock (I/O/Z).
CLKS0/AHCLKR0
28
K3
I
IPD
CLKR0/ACLKR0
CLKX0/ACLKX0
DR0/AXR0[0]
19
16
27
20
H3
G3
J1
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I
IPD
IPD
IPU
IPU
McBSP0 receive clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 receive bit clock (I/O/Z).
McBSP0 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 transmit bit clock (I/O/Z).
McBSP0 receive data (I) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 0 (I/O/Z).
McBSP0 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or McASP0 TX/RX data pin 1 (I/O/Z).
DX0/AXR0[1]
H2
O/Z
McBSP0 receive frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 receive frame sync or
left/right clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
FSR0/AFSR0
FSX0/AFSX0
24
21
J3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
IPD
McBSP0 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or McASP0 transmit frame sync or
left/right clock (LRCLK) (I/O/Z).
H1
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 1 (I2C1)
McBSP1 external clock source (as opposed to internal) (I) [default] or I2C1 clock
(I/O/Z).
This pin must be externally pulled up. When this pin is used as an I2C pin, the
value of the pullup resistor is dependent on the number of devices connected to
the I2C bus. For more details, see the Philips I C Specification Revision 2.1
CLKS1/SCL1
DR1/SDA1
8
E1
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
—
2
(January 2000).
McBSP1 receive data (I) [default] or I2C1 data (I/O/Z).
This pin must be externally pulled up. When this pin is used as an I2C pin, the
value of the pullup resistor is dependent on the number of devices connected to
37
M2
—
2
the I2C bus. For more details, see the Philips I C Specification Revision 2.1
(January 2000).
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 0 (I2C0)
I2C0 clock.
This pin must be externally pulled up. The value of the pullup resistor on this pin
SCL0
SDA0
41
42
N1
N2
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
—
—
is dependent on the number of devices connected to the I2C bus. For more
2
details, see the Philips I C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000).
I2C0 data.
This pin must be externally pulled up. The value of the pullup resistor on this pin
is dependent on the number of devices connected to the I2C bus. For more
2
details, see the Philips I C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000).
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
56
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
IPD/
IPU‡
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT (GPIO)
Host-port data pins (I/O/Z) [default] or general-purpose input/output pins
(I/O/Z) and some function as boot configuration pins at reset.
HD15/GP[15]
HD14/GP[14]
HD13/GP[13]
HD12/GP[12]
HD11/GP[11]
HD10/GP[10]
HD9/GP[9]
174
173
172
168
167
166
165
160
B14
C14
A15
C15
A16
B16
C16
B17
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
•
•
Used for transfer of data, address, and control
Also controls initialization of DSP modes at reset via pullup/pulldown
resistors
As general-purpose input/output (GP[x]) functions, these pins are software-con-
figurable through registers. The “GPxEN” bits in the GP Enable register and the
GPxDIR bits in the GP Direction register must be properly configured:
I/O/Z
GPxEN = 1; GP[x] pin is enabled.
GPxDIR = 0; GP[x] pin is an input.
GPxDIR = 1; GP[x] pin is an output.
For the functionality description of the Host-port data pins or the boot configura-
tion pins, see the Host-Port Interface (HPI) portion of this table.
HD8/GP[8]
General-purpose input/output pins (I/O/Z) which also function as external
interrupts
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
7
2
E3
D2
•
•
Edge-driven
Polarity independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register
bits (EXTPOL.[3:0])
GP[5](EXT_INT5)/
AMUTEIN0
I/O/Z
IPU
6
1
C1
C2
GP[4] and GP[5] pins also function as AMUTEIN1 McASP1 mute input and
AMUTEIN0 McASP0 mute input, respectively, if enabled by the INEN bit in the
associated McASP AMUTE register.
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/
AMUTEIN1
Host-port data pin 7 (I/O/Z) [default] or general-purpose input/output pin 3
(I/O/Z)
HD7/GP[3]
164
82
A18
Y12
J20
C19
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
O
IPU
IPD
IPU
IPD
Clock output at half of device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be
programmed as GP[2] pin.
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
HINT/GP[1]
HD4/GP[0]
Host interrupt (from DSP to host) (O) [default] or this pin can be programmed as
a GP[1] pin (I/O/Z).
135
156
Host-port data pin 4 (I/O/Z) [ default] or this pin can be programmed as a GP[0]
pin (I/O/Z).
I/O/Z
RESERVED FOR TEST
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
198
200
179
—
A5
B5
O/Z
IPU
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
§
A
C12
D7
O
—
O/Z
IPD
Reserved. This pin does not have an IPU. For proper device
operation, the D12/178 pin must be externally pulled down with a 10-kΩresistor.
RSV
RSV
RSV
178
181
180
D12
A12
B11
I
—
—
—
Reserved. [For new designs, it is recommended that this pin be connected di-
rectly to CV
DD
(core power). For old designs, this can be left unconnected.
Reserved. [For new designs, it is recommended that this pin be connected di-
rectly to V (ground). For old designs, this pin can be left unconnected.
ss
†
‡
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [To oppose the supply rail on these IPD/IPU signal pins, use external pullup or pulldown resistors
no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively.]
57
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
A17
B3
B8
B13
C10
D1
D16
D19
F3
H18
J2
M18
R1
R18
T3
U5
U7
U12
U16
V13
V15
V19
W3
W9
W12
Y7
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
DV
S
DD
Y17
—
9
—
25
44
47
55
58
65
72
84
87
98
107
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
†
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
58
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
114
126
141
162
183
188
206
—
—
—
—
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
—
DV
S
DD
—
—
—
A4
—
A9
—
A10
B2
—
—
B19
C3
—
—
C7
—
C18
D5
—
—
D6
—
D11
D14
D15
F4
—
—
—
—
F17
K1
1.2-V supply voltage [PYP package]
1.20-V supply voltage [GDP and ZDP packages] (See Note)
1.4-V supply voltage [GDP and ZDP packages C6711D-300 only]
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
—
CV
S
DD
—
K4
—
K17
L4
—
—
L17
L20
R4
—
—
—
R17
U6
—
—
U10
U11
U14
U15
V3
—
—
—
—
—
V18
W2
W19
—
Note: This value is compatible with existing 1.26-V designs.
—
†
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
59
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
†
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
TYPE
PYP
ZDP
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
11
14
22
29
35
40
43
46
50
51
53
60
67
80
1.2-V supply voltage [PYP package]
89
CV
S
1.20-V supply voltage [GDP and ZDP packages] (See Note)
1.4-V supply voltage [GDP and ZDP packages C6711D-300 only]
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
DD
96
104
105
116
124
133
149
157
169
171
177
190
195
196
201
208
Note: This value is compatible with existing 1.26-V designs.
GROUND PINS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A1
A2
A11
A14
A19
A20
B1
V
SS
GND
Ground pins
B4
†
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
60
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
†
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
PYP
ZDP
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B15
B20
C6
C8
C9
D4
D8
D13
D17
E2
E4
E17
F19
G4
G17
H4
H17
J4
#
Ground pins
J9
The center thermal balls (J9−J12, K9−K12, L9−L12, M9−M12) [shaded] are all tied to ground
and act as both electrical grounds and thermal relief (thermal dissipation).
V
SS
GND
J10
J11
J12
K2
K9
K10
K11
K12
K20
L9
L10
L11
L12
M4
M9
M10
M11
M12
M17
†
#
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Shaded pin numbers denote the center thermal balls.
61
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
†
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
PYP
ZDP
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
N4
N17
P4
P17
P19
T4
T17
U4
U8
U9
U13
U17
U20
W1
W5
W11
W16
W20
Y1
Y2
V
SS
GND
Ground pins
Y13
Y19
Y20
—
10
15
23
26
30
34
39
45
48
49
52
54
59
66
73
81
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
†
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
62
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
†
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
GDP/
PYP
ZDP
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
85
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
88
97
106
115
125
134
142
148
158
163
170
182
189
194
199
203
207
V
SS
GND
Ground pins
†
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
63
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
development support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of C6000 DSP-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS), which provides the basic run-time target software
needed to support any DSP application.
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS) Emulator (supports C6000 DSP multiprocessor system debug)
EVM (Evaluation Module)
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
C6000 and XDS are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
64
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
device support
device and development-support tool nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all DSP
devices and support tools. Each DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS.
(e.g., TMS320C6713BGDP300). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for
support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from
engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
TMP
TMS
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’s electrical
specifications.
Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification.
Fully qualified production device.
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification
testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product.
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped with the following disclaimer:
“Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes.”
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability
of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard production
devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system because their
expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type
(for example, GDP), the temperature range (for example, blank is the default commercial temperature range),
and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, -225 is 225 MHz).
The ZDP package, like the GDP package, is a 272-ball plastic BGA only with Pb-free balls. For device part
numbers and further ordering information for TMS320C6713B in the PYP, GDP and ZDP package types, see
the TI website (http://www.ti.com) or contact your TI sales representative.
TMS320 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
65
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
device and development-support tool nomenclature (continued)
(
)
TMS 320
C 6713B GDP
300
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
167 MHz
200 MHz
225 MHz
300 MHz
PREFIX
TMX= Experimental device
TMP= Prototype device
TMS= Qualified device
SMJ = MIL-PRF-38535, QML
SM = High Rel (non-38535)
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 90°C)
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, commercial temperature
A
= −40°C to 105°C, extended temperature
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320 DSP family
†‡§
PACKAGE TYPE
GDP = 272-pin plastic BGA
PYP = 208-pin PowerPADt plastic QFP
ZDP = 272-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-free soldered balls
TECHNOLOGY
C = CMOS
DEVICE
C6713B
†
‡
§
BGA
QFP
=
=
Ball Grid Array
Quad Flatpack
The ZDP mechanical package designator represents the version of the GDP with Pb−Free soldered balls. The ZDP package
devices are supported in the same speed grades as the GDP package devices (available upon request).
For actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the Mechanical Data section of this
document or the TI website (www.ti.com).
Figure 12. TMS320C6000 DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the TMS320C6713B Device)
MicroStar BGA and PowerPAD are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
66
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
documentation support
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320 DSP family generations of devices from product
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data sheets,
such as this document, with design specifications; complete user’s reference guides for all devices and tools;
technical briefs; development-support tools; on-line help; and hardware and software applications. The
following is a brief, descriptive list of support documentation specific to the C6000 DSP devices:
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189) describes the
C6000 CPU (DSP core) architecture, instruction set, pipeline, and associated interrupts.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide [hereafter referred to as the C6000 PRG
Overview] (literature number SPRU190) provides an overview and briefly describes the functionality of the
peripherals available on the C6000 DSP platform of devices. This document also includes a table listing the
peripherals available on the C6000 devices along with literature numbers and hyperlinks to the associated
peripheral documents. These C6713B peripherals are similar to the peripherals on the TMS320C6711 and
TMS320C64x devices; therefore, see the TMS320C6711 (C6711 or C67x) peripheral information, and in some
cases, where indicated, see the TMS320C6711 (C6711 or C671x) peripheral information and in some cases,
where indicated, see the C64x information in the C6000 PRG Overview (literature number SPRU190).
The TMS320DA6000 DSP Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) Reference Guide (literature number
SPRU041) describes the functionality of the McASP peripherals available on the C6713B device.
TMS320C6000 DSP Software-Programmable Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Controller Reference Guide
(literature number SPRU233) describes the functionality of the PLL peripheral available on the C6713B device.
TMS320C6000 DSP Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module Reference Guide (literature number SPRU175)
describes the functionality of the I2C peripherals available on the C6713B device.
The PowerPAD Thermally Enhanced Package Technical Brief (literature number SLMA002) focuses on the
specifics of integrating a PowerPAD package into the printed circuit board design to make optimum use of the
thermal efficiencies designed into the PowerPAD package.
The TMS320C6000 Technical Brief (literature number SPRU197) gives an introduction to the C62x/C67x
devices, associated development tools, and third-party support.
The Migrating from TMS320C6211(B)/C6711(B) to TMS320C6713 application report (literature number
SPRA851) indicates the differences and describes the issues of interest related to the migration from the Texas
Instruments TMS320C6211(B)/C6711(B), GFN package, to the TMS320C6713, GDP and ZDP packages.
The TMS320C6713, TMS320C6713B Digital Signal Processors Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ191)
describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications for particular silicon revisions of the
TMS320C6713B device.
The TMS320C6711D, C6712D, C6713B Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number
SPRA889A2 or later) discusses the power consumption for user applications with the TMS320C6713B,
TMS320C6712D, and TMS320C6711D DSP devices.
The Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839) describes how to
properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system.
The tools support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer Studio Integrated
Development Environment (IDE). For a complete listing of C6000 DSP latest documentation, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL).
See the Worldwide Web URL for the application report How To Begin Development Today With the
TMS320C6713 Floating-Point DSP (literature number SPRA809), which describes in more detail the
similarities/differences between the C6713 and C6711 C6000 DSP devices.
C62x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
67
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
CPU CSR register description
The CPU control status register (CSR) contains the CPU ID and CPU Revision ID (bits 16−31) as well as the
status of the device power-down modes [PWRD field (bits 15−10)], program and data cache control modes, the
endian bit (EN, bit 8) and the global interrupt enable (GIE, bit 0) and previous GIE (PGIE, bit 1). Figure 13 and
Table 24 identify the bit fields in the CPU CSR register.
For more detailed information on the bit fields in the CPU CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals
Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190) and the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
31
24 23
16
CPU ID
R-0x02
REVISION ID
R-0x03
15
10
9
8
7
6
5 4
2
1
0
PWRD
R/W-0
SAT
R/C-0
EN
PCC
R/W-0
DCC
PGIE
GIE
R-1
R/W-0
R/W-0 R/W-0
Legend: R = Readable by the MVC instruction, R/W = Readable/Writeable by the MVC instruction; W = Read/write; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after
reset, C = Clearable by the MVC instruction
Figure 13. CPU Control Status Register (CPU CSR)
68
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
CPU CSR register description (continued)
Table 24. CPU CSR Register Bit Field Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
CPU ID + REV ID. Read only.
Identifies which CPU is used and defines the silicon revision of the CPU.
31:24
CPU ID
23:16
15:10
REVISION ID
PWRD
CPU ID + REVISION ID (31:16) are combined for a value of 0x0203
Control power-down modes. The values are always read as zero.
000000
001001
010001
011010
011100
Others
=
=
=
=
=
=
no power-down (default)
PD1, wake-up by an enabled interrupt
PD1, wake-up by an enabled or not enabled interrupt
PD2, wake-up by a device reset
PD3, wake-up by a device reset
Reserved
Saturate bit.
Set when any unit performs a saturate. This bit can be cleared only by the MVC instruction and can
be set only by a functional unit. The set by the a functional unit has priority over a clear (by the MVC
instruction) if they occur on the same cycle. The saturate bit is set one full cycle (one delay slot) after
a saturate occurs. This bit will not be modified by a conditional instruction whose condition is false.
9
SAT
Endian bit. This bit is read-only.
Depicts the device endian mode.
8
EN
0
1
=
=
Big Endian mode.
Little Endian mode [default].
Program Cache control mode.
L1D, Level 1 Program Cache
7:5
4:2
PCC
DCC
000/010
=
Cache Enabled / Cache accessed and updated on reads.
All other PCC values reserved.
Data Cache control mode.
L1D, Level 1 Data Cache
000/010
=
Cache Enabled / 2-Way Cache
All other DCC values reserved
Previous GIE (global interrupt enable); saves the Global Interrupt Enable (GIE) when an interrupt is
taken. Allows for proper nesting of interrupts.
1
0
PGIE
GIE
0
1
=
=
Previous GIE value is 0. (default)
Previous GIE value is 1.
Global interrupt enable bit.
Enables (1) or disables (0) all interrupts except the reset interrupt and NMI (nonmaskable interrupt).
0
1
=
=
Disables all interrupts (except the reset interrupt and NMI) [default]
Enables all interrupts (except the reset interrupt and NMI)
69
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
cache configuration (CCFG) register description
The C6713B device includes an enhancement to the cache configuration (CCFG) register. A “P” bit
(CCFG.31) allows the programmer to select the priority of accesses to L2 memory originating from the transfer
crossbar (TC) over accesses originating from the L1D memory system. An important class of TC accesses is
EDMA transfers, which move data to or from the L2 memory. While the EDMA normally has no issue accessing
L2 memory due to the high hit rates on the L1D memory system, there are pathological cases where certain
CPU behavior could block the EDMA from accessing the L2 memory for long enough to cause a missed deadline
when transferring data to a peripheral such as the McASP or McBSP. This can be avoided by setting the P bit
to “1” because the EDMA will assume a higher priority than the L1D memory system when accessing L2
memory.
For more detailed information on the P-bit function and for silicon advisories concerning EDMA L2 memory
accesses blocked, see the TMS320C6713, TMS320C6713B Digital Signal Processors Silicon Errata (literature
number SPRZ191).
7
31
30
10
9
8
3
2
0
†
P
Reserved
R-x
IP
ID
Reserved
R-0 0000
L2MODE
R/W-000
R/W-0
W-0
W-0
Legend: R = Readable; R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset; -x = undefined value after reset
†
This device includes a P bit.
Figure 14. Cache Configuration Register (CCFG)
Table 25. CCFG Register Bit Field Description
BIT #
31
NAME
DESCRIPTION
L1D requestor priority to L2 bit.
P
Reserved
IP
P
P
=
=
0: L1D requests to L2 higher priority than TC requests
1: TC requests to L2 higher priority than L1D requests
30:10
9
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Invalidate L1P bit.
0
1
=
=
Normal L1P operation
All L1P lines are invalidated
Invalidate L1D bit.
8
ID
0
1
=
=
Normal L1D operation
All L1D lines are invalidated
7:3
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
L2 operation mode bits (L2MODE).
000b = L2 Cache disabled (All SRAM mode) [256K SRAM]
001b = 1-way Cache (16K L2 Cache) / [240K SRAM]
010b = 2-way Cache (32K L2 Cache) / [224K SRAM]
2:0
L2MODE
011b
111b
=
=
3-way Cache (48K L2 Cache) / [208K SRAM]
4-way Cache (64K L2 Cache) / [192K SRAM]
All others Reserved
70
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
interrupts and interrupt selector
The C67x DSP core supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 26. The highest priority interrupt
is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest priority is INT_15. The first four interrupts are non-maskable
and fixed. The remaining interrupts (4−15) are maskable and default to the interrupt source listed in Table 26.
However, their interrupt source may be reprogrammed to any one of the sources listed in Table 27 (Interrupt
Selector). Table 27 lists the selector value corresponding to each of the alternate interrupt sources. The selector
choice for interrupts 4−15 is made by programming the corresponding fields (listed in Table 26) in the MUXH
(address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004) registers.
71
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table 26. DSP Interrupts
Table 27. Interrupt Selector
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
DEFAULT
SELECTOR
VALUE
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
VALUE
DSP
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
DEFAULT
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INTERRUPT
EVENT
MODULE
(BINARY)
(BINARY)
INT_00
INT_01
INT_02
INT_03
INT_04
INT_05
INT_06
INT_07
INT_08
INT_09
INT_10
INT_11
INT_12
INT_13
INT_14
INT_15
−
−
RESET
NMI
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
DSPINT
TINT0
TINT1
SDINT
HPI
Timer 0
Timer 1
EMIF
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
EDMA
Emulation
Emulation
Emulation
McBSP0
McBSP0
McBSP1
McBSP1
GPIO
−
−
−
−
−
Reserved
Reserved
−
−
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
MUXL[4:0]
MUXL[9:5]
MUXL[14:10]
MUXL[20:16]
MUXL[25:21]
MUXL[30:26]
MUXH[4:0]
MUXH[9:5]
MUXH[14:10]
MUXH[20:16]
MUXH[25:21]
MUXH[30:26]
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
00011
01010
01011
00000
00001
00010
GPINT4
GPINT5
GPINT6
GPINT7
GPINT4
GPINT5
GPINT6
GPINT7
EDMAINT
EMUDTDMA
SDINT
EDMAINT
EMUDTDMA
EMURTDXRX
EMURTDXTX
XINT0
EMURTDXRX
EMURTDXTX
DSPINT
RINT0
TINT0
XINT1
TINT1
RINT1
GPINT0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I2CINT0
−
−
−
−
I2C0
I2CINT1
I2C1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
AXINT0
−
−
−
−
McASP0
McASP0
McASP1
McASP1
ARINT0
AXINT1
ARINT1
†
Interrupt Events GPINT4, GPINT5, GPINT6, and GPINT7 are outputs from the GPIO module (GP). They originate from the device pins
GP[4](EXT_INT4)/AMUTEIN1, GP[5](EXT_INT5)/AMUTEIN0, GP[6](EXT_INT6), and GP[7](EXT_INT7). These pins can be used as
edge-sensitive EXT_INTx with polarity controlled by the External Interrupt Polarity Register (EXTPOL.[3:0]). The corresponding pins must
first be enabled in the GPIO module by setting the corresponding enable bits in the GP Enable Register (GPEN.[7:4]), and configuring them
as inputs in the GP Direction Register (GPDIR.[7:4]). These interrupts can be controlled through the GPIO module in addition to the simple
EXTPOL.[3:0] bits. For more information on interrupt control via the GPIO module, see the TMS320C6000 DSP General-Purpose
Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU584).
72
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
external interrupt sources
The device supports many external interrupt sources as indicated in Table 28. Control of the interrupt source
is done by the associated module and is made available by enabling the corresponding binary interrupt selector
value (see Table 27 Interrupt Selector shaded rows). Due to pin muxing and module usage, not all external
interrupt sources are available at the same time.
Table 28. External Interrupt Sources and Peripheral Module Control
PIN
NAME
INTERRUPT
EVENT
MODULE
GP[15]
GP[14]
GP[13]
GP[12]
GP[11]
GP[10]
GP[9]
GP[8]
GP[7]
GP[6]
GP[5]
GP[4]
GP[3]
GP[2]
GP[1]
GP[0]
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0 or GPINT7
GPINT0 or GPINT6
GPINT0 or GPINT5
GPINT0 or GPINT4
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0
GPINT0
73
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
EDMA module and EDMA selector
The C67x EDMA supports up to 16 EDMA channels. Four of the sixteen channels (channels 8−11) are reserved
for EDMA chaining, leaving 12 EDMA channels available to service peripheral devices.
The EDMA selector registers that control the EDMA channels servicing peripheral devices are located at
addresses 0x01A0FF00 (ESEL0), 0x01A0FF04 (ESEL1), and 0x01A0FF0C (ESEL3). These EDMA selector
registers control the mapping of the EDMA events to the EDMA channels. Each EDMA event has an assigned
EDMA selector code (see Table 30). By loading each EVTSELx register field with an EDMA selector code, users
can map any desired EDMA event to any specified EDMA channel. Table 29 lists the default EDMA selector
value for each EDMA channel.
See Table 31 and Table 32 for the EDMA Event Selector registers and their associated bit descriptions.
74
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
ꢋ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
EDMA module and EDMA selector (continued)
Table 29. EDMA Channels
Table 30. EDMA Selector
EDMA
DEFAULT
SELECTOR
VALUE
DEFAULT
EDMA
EVENT
EDMA
EDMA
EDMA
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
SELECTOR
MODULE
EVENT
CODE (BINARY)
(BINARY)
0
1
ESEL0[5:0]
ESEL0[13:8]
ESEL0[21:16]
ESEL0[29:24]
ESEL1[5:0]
ESEL1[13:8]
ESEL1[21:16]
ESEL1[29:24]
−
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
−
DSPINT
TINT0
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
DSPINT
TINT0
HPI
TIMER0
TIMER1
EMIF
2
TINT1
TINT1
3
SDINT
SDINT
4
GPINT4
GPINT5
GPINT6
GPINT7
GPINT4
GPINT5
GPINT6
GPINT7
GPINT0
GPINT1
GPINT2
GPINT3
XEVT0
REVT0
XEVT1
REVT1
GPIO
5
GPIO
6
GPIO
7
GPIO
8
TCC8 (Chaining)
TCC9 (Chaining)
TCC10 (Chaining)
TCC11 (Chaining)
XEVT0
GPIO
9
−
−
GPIO
10
11
12
13
14
15
−
−
GPIO
−
−
GPIO
ESEL3[5:0]
ESEL3[13:8]
ESEL3[21:16]
ESEL3[29:24]
001100
001101
001110
001111
McBSP0
McBSP0
McBSP1
McBSP1
REVT0
XEVT1
REVT1
010000−011111
100000
100001
100010
100011
100100
100101
100110
100111
101000
101001
101010
101011
101100
101101
101110
101111
Reserved
AXEVTE0
AXEVTO0
AXEVT0
McASP0
McASP0
McASP0
McASP0
McASP0
McASP0
McASP1
McASP1
McASP1
McASP1
McASP1
McASP1
I2C0
AREVTE0
AREVTO0
AREVT0
AXEVTE1
AXEVTO1
AXEVT1
AREVTE1
AREVTO1
AREVT1
I2CREVT0
I2CXEVT0
I2CREVT1
I2CXEVT1
GPINT8
I2C0
I2C1
I2C1
110000
110001
110010
110011
110100
110101
110110
110111
GPIO
GPINT9
GPIO
GPINT10
GPINT11
GPINT12
GPINT13
GPINT14
GPINT15
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
111000−111111
Reserved
75
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
EDMA module and EDMA selector (continued)
Table 31. EDMA Event Selector Registers (ESEL0, ESEL1, and ESEL3)
ESEL0 Register (0x01A0 FF00)
30
31
29
28 27
24 23
22 21
20 19
16
0
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL3
R/W−00 0011b
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL2
R/W−00 0010b
4 3
14
15
13
12 11
8
7
6
5
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL1
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL0
R/W−00 0000b
R/W−00 0001b
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
ESEL1 Register (0x01A0 FF04)
30
31
29
13
28 27
24 23
22 21
20 19
16
0
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL7
R/W−00 0111b
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL6
R/W−00 0110b
4 3
14
15
12 11
8
7
6
5
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL5
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL4
R/W−00 0100b
R/W−00 0101b
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
ESEL3 Register (0x01A0 FF0C)
30
31
29
13
28 27
24 23
22 21
20 19
16
0
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL15
R/W−00 1111b
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL14
R/W−00 1110b
4 3
14
15
12 11
8
7
6
5
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL13
Reserved
R−0
EVTSEL12
R/W−00 1100b
R/W−00 1101b
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Table 32. EDMA Event Selection Registers (ESEL0, ESEL1, and ESEL3) Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
31:30
23:22
15:14
7:6
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
EDMA event selection bits for channel x. Allows mapping of the EDMA events to the EDMA channels.
The EVTSEL0 through EVTSEL15 bits correspond to the channels 0 to 15, respectively. These
EVTSELx fields are user−selectable. By configuring the EVTSELx fields to the EDMA selector value
of the desired EDMA sync event number (see Table 30), users can map any EDMA event to the
EDMA channel.
29:24
21:16
13:8
5:0
EVTSELx
For example, if EVTSEL15 is programmed to 00 0001b (the EDMA selector code for TINT0), then
channel 15 is triggered by Timer0 TINT0 events.
76
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller
The TMS320C6713B includes a PLL and a flexible PLL Controller peripheral consisting of a prescaler (D0) and
four dividers (OSCDIV1, D1, D2, and D3). The PLL controller is able to generate different clocks for different
parts of the system (i.e., DSP core, Peripheral Data Bus, External Memory Interface, McASP, and other
peripherals). Figure 15 illustrates the PLL, the PLL controller, and the clock generator logic.
PLLHV
+3.3 V
EMI filter
C1
C2
10 µF 0.1 µF
CLKMODE0
CLKIN
PLLOUT
PLLREF
DIVIDER D0
/1, /2,
..., /32
PLLEN (PLL_CSR.[0])
1
0
PLL
x4 to x25
†
DIVIDER D1
1
0
ENA
Reserved
CLKOUT3
/1, /2,
SYSCLK1
(DSP Core)
..., /32
ENA
D1EN (PLLDIV1.[15])
D0EN (PLLDIV0.[15])
†
DIVIDER D2
/1, /2,
SYSCLK2
(Peripherals)
..., /32
OSCDIV1
D2EN (PLLDIV2.[15])
ENA
/1, /2,
..., /32
For Use
in System
AUXCLK
(Internal Clock Source
to McASP0 and McASP1)
DIVIDER D3
ENA
/1, /2,
..., /32
OD1EN (OSCDIV1.[15])
SYSCLK3
ENA
D3EN (PLLDIV3.[15])
ECLKIN
(EMIF Clock Input)
EKSRC Bit
1
0
(DEVCFG.[4])
EMIF
C6713B DSP
ECLKOUT
Dividers D1 and D2 must never be disabled. Never write a “0” to the D1EN or D2EN bits in the PLLDIV1 and PLLDIV2 registers.
†
NOTES: A. Place all PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter) as close to the C67x DSP device as possible. For the best
performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without jumpers, switches, or
components other than the ones shown.
B. For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI
Filter).
C. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DV
D. EMI filter manufacturer TDK part number ACF451832-333, -223, -153, -103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.
.
DD
Figure 15. PLL and Clock Generator Logic
77
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller (continued)
The PLL Reset Time is the amount of wait time needed when resetting the PLL (writing PLLRST=1), in order
for the PLL to properly reset, before bringing the PLL out of reset (writing PLLRST = 0). For the PLL Reset Time
value, see Table 33. The PLL Lock Time is the amount of time from when PLLRST = 0 with PLLEN = 0 (PLL
out of reset, but still bypassed) to when the PLLEN bit can be safely changed to “1” (switching from bypass to
the PLL path), see Table 33 and Figure 15.
Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL Lock Time may vary from the specified typical value. For
the PLL Lock Time values, see Table 33.
Table 33. PLL Lock and Reset Times
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
µs
PLL Lock Time
PLL Reset Time
75
187.5
125
ns
Table 34 shows the device’s CLKOUT signals, how they are derived and by what register control bits, and what
is the default settings. For more details on the PLL, see the PLL and Clock Generator Logic diagram (Figure 15).
Table 34. CLKOUT Signals, Default Settings, and Control
CLOCK OUTPUT
SIGNAL NAME
DEFAULT SETTING
(ENABLED or DISABLED)
CONTROL
BIT(s) (Register)
DESCRIPTION
D2EN = 1 (PLLDIV2.[15])
CK2EN = 1 (EMIF GBLCTL.[3])
CLKOUT2
CLKOUT3
ON (ENABLED)
ON (ENABLED)
SYSCLK2 selected [default]
OD1EN = 1 (OSCDIV1.[15])
Derived from CLKIN
SYSCLK3 selected [default].
ON (ENABLED);
derived from SYSCLK3
EKSRC = 0 (DEVCFG.[4])
EKEN = 1 (EMIF GBLCTL.[5])
To select ECLKIN source:
EKSRC = 1 (DEVCFG.[4]) and
EKEN = 1 (EMIF GBLCTL.[5])
ECLKOUT
The input clock (CLKIN) is directly available to the McASP modules as AUXCLK for use as an internal
high-frequency clock source. The input clock (CLKIN) may also be divided down by a programmable divider
OSCDIV1 (/1, /2, /3, ..., /32) and output on the CLKOUT3 pin for other use in the system.
Figure 15 shows that the input clock source may be divided down by divider PLLDIV0 (/1, /2, ..., /32) and then
multiplied up by a factor of x4, x5, x6, and so on, up to x25.
Either the input clock (PLLEN = 0) or the PLL output (PLLEN = 1) then serves as the high-frequency reference
clock for the rest of the DSP system. The DSP core clock, the peripheral bus clock, and the EMIF clock may
be divided down from this high-frequency clock (each with a unique divider) . For example, with a 30 MHz input
if the PLL output is configured for 450 MHz, the DSP core may be operated at 225 MHz (/2) while the EMIF may
be configured to operate at a rate of 75 MHz (/6). Note that there is a specific minimum and maximum reference
clock (PLLREF) and output clock (PLLOUT) for the block labeled PLL in Figure 15, as well as for the DSP core,
peripheral bus, and EMIF. The clock generator must not be configured to exceed any of these constraints
(certain combinations of external clock input, internal dividers, and PLL multiply ratios might not be supported).
See Table 35 for the PLL clocks input and output frequency ranges.
78
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller (continued)
†‡
Table 35. PLL Clock Frequency Ranges
PYP −200, -225
GDP/ZDP −225, -300
PYPA −167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
CLOCK SIGNAL
UNIT
MIN
12
140
−
MAX
PLLREF (PLLEN = 1)
100
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
PLLOUT
SYSCLK1
600
Device Speed (DSP Core)
100
SYSCLK3 (EKSRC = 0)
−
§
50
AUXCLK
−
†
‡
SYSCLK2 rate must be exactly half of SYSCLK1.
Also see the electrical specification (timing requirements and switching characteristics parameters) in the input and output clocks section of this
data sheet.
§
When the McASP module is not used, the AUXCLK maximum frequency can be any frequency up to the CLKIN maximum frequency.
The EMIF itself may be clocked by an external reference clock via the ECLKIN pin or can be generated on-chip
as SYSCLK3. SYSCLK3 is derived from divider D3 off of PLLOUT (see Figure 15, PLL and Clock Generator
Logic). The EMIF clock selection is programmable via the EKSRC bit in the DEVCFG register.
The settings for the PLL multiplier and each of the dividers in the clock generation block may be reconfigured
via software at run time. If either the input to the PLL changes due to D0, CLKMODE0, or CLKIN, or if the PLL
multiplier is changed, then software must enter bypass first and stay in bypass until the PLL has had enough
time to lock (see electrical specifications). For the programming procedure, see the TMS320C6000 DSP
Software-Programmable Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU233).
SYSCLK2 is the internal clock source for peripheral bus control. SYSCLK2 (Divider D2) must be programmed
to be half of the SYSCLK1 rate. For example, if D1 is configured to divide-by-2 mode (/2), then D2 must be
programmed to divide-by-4 mode (/4). SYSCLK2 is also tied directly to CLKOUT2 pin (see Figure 15).
During the programming transition of Divider D1 and Divider D2 (resulting in SYSCLK1 and SYSCLK2 output
clocks, see Figure 15), the order of programming the PLLDIV1 and PLLDIV2 registers must be observed to
ensure that SYSCLK2 always runs at half the SYSCLK1 rate or slower. For example, if the divider ratios of D1
and D2 are to be changed from /1, /2 (respectively) to /5, /10 (respectively) then, the PLLDIV2 register must be
programmed before the PLLDIV1 register. The transition ratios become /1, /2; /1, /10; and then /5, /10. If the
divider ratios of D1 and D2 are to be changed from /3, /6 to /1, /2 then, the PLLDIV1 register must be programmed
before the PLLDIV2 register. The transition ratios, for this case, become /3, /6; /1, /6; and then /1, /2. The final
SYSCLK2 rate must be exactly half of the SYSCLK1 rate.
Note that Divider D1 and Divider D2 must always be enabled (i. e., D1EN and D2EN bits are set to “1” in the
PLLDIV1 and PLLDIV2 registers).
The PLL Controller registers should be modified only by the CPU or via emulation. The HPI should not be used
to directly access the PLL Controller registers.
For detailed information on the clock generator (PLL Controller registers) and their associated software bit
descriptions, see Table 37 through Table 43.
79
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller (continued)
Table 36. PLL Control/Status Register (PLLCSR) [0x01B7 C100]
28 27
24 23
20 19
31
15
16
0
Reserved
R−0
5
12 11
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Reserved
R−0
STABLE
R−x
Reserved
R−0
PLLRST
RW−1
Reserved
R/W−0
PLLPWRDN
R/W−0b
PLLEN
RW−0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Table 37. PLL Control/Status Register (PLLCSR) Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
31:7
Reserved
Clock Input Stable. This bit indicates if the clock input has stabilized.
6
5:4
3
STABLE
Reserved
PLLRST
0
1
–
–
Clock input not yet stable. Clock counter is not finished counting (default).
Clock input stable.
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Asserts RESET to PLL
0
1
–
–
PLL Reset Released.
PLL Reset Asserted (default).
2
Reserved
PLLPWRDN
Reserved. The user must write a “0” to this bit.
Select PLL Power Down
1
0
1
–
–
PLL Operational (default).
PLL Placed in Power-Down State.
PLL Mode Enable
0
–
Bypass Mode (default). PLL disabled.
Divider D0 and PLL are bypassed. SYSCLK1/SYSCLK2/SYSCLK3 are divided down
directly from input reference clock.
0
PLLEN
1
–
PLL Enabled.
Divider D0 and PLL are not bypassed. SYSCLK1/SYSCLK2/SYSCLK3 are divided down
from PLL output.
80
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller (continued)
Table 38. PLL Multiplier Control Register (PLLM) [0x01B7 C110]
28 27
12 11
24 23
20 19
31
15
16
0
Reserved
R−0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Reserved
R−0
PLLM
R/W−0 0111
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Table 39. PLL Multiplier Control Register (PLLM) Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
PLL multiply mode [default is x7 (0 0111)].
31:5
Reserved
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
x4
x5
x6
x7
x8
x9
x10
x11
x12
x13
x14
x15
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
x16
x17
x18
x19
x20
x21
x22
x23
4:0
PLLM
x24
x25
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PLLM select values 00000 through 00011 and 11010 through 11111 are not supported.
81
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller (continued)
Table 40. PLL Wrapper Divider x Registers (PLLDIV0, PLLDIV1, PLLDIV2, and PLLDIV3)
[0x01B7 C114, 0x01B7 C118, 0x01B7 C11C, and 0x01B7 C120, respectively]
28 27
24 23
20 19
31
16
0
Reserved
R−0
7
14
15
12 11
8
5
4
3
2
1
DxEN
R/W−1
Reserved
R−0
PLLDIVx
R/W−x xxxx
†
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
†
Default values for the PLLDIV0, PLLDIV1, PLLDIV2, and PLLDIV3 bits are /1 (0 0000), /1 (0 0000), /2 (0 0001), and /2 (0 0001), respectively.
CAUTION:
D1 and D2 should never be disabled. D3 should only be disabled if ECLKIN is used.
Table 41. PLL Wrapper Divider x Registers (Prescaler Divider D0 and Post-Scaler Dividers D1,
‡
D2, and D3) Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Divider Dx Enable (where x denotes 0 through 3).
31:16
Reserved
0
1
–
−
Divider x Disabled. No clock output.
Divider x Enabled (default).
15
DxEN
These divider-enable bits are device-specific and must be set to 1 to enable.
14:5
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
PLL Divider Ratio [Default values for the PLLDIV0, PLLDIV1, PLLDIV2, and PLLDIV3 bits are /1, /1,
/2, and /2, respectively].
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/1
/2
/3
/4
/5
/6
/7
/8
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/17
/18
/19
/20
/21
/22
/23
/24
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30
/31
/32
4:0
PLLDIVx
/9
/10
/11
/12
/13
/14
/15
/16
‡
Note that SYSCLK2 must run at half the rate of SYSCLK1. Therefore, the divider ratio of D2 must be two times slower than D1. For example,
if D1 is set to /2, then D2 must be set to /4.
82
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PLL and PLL controller (continued)
Table 42. Oscillator Divider 1 Register (OSCDIV1) [0x01B7 C124]
28 27
12 11
24 23
20 19
31
16
0
Reserved
R−0
7
14
15
8
5
4
3
2
1
OD1EN
R/W−1
Reserved
R−0
OSCDIV1
R/W−0 0111
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
The OSCDIV1 register controls the oscillator divider 1 for CLKOUT3. The CLKOUT3 signal does not go through
the PLL path.
Table 43. Oscillator Divider 1 Register (OSCDIV1) Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Oscillator Divider 1 Enable.
31:16
Reserved
15
OD1EN
0
1
–
−
Oscillator Divider 1 Disabled.
Oscillator Divider 1 Enabled (default).
14:5
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Oscillator Divider 1 Ratio [default is /8 (0 0111)].
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/1
/2
/3
/4
/5
/6
/7
/8
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/17
/18
/19
/20
/21
/22
/23
/24
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30
/31
/32
4:0
OSCDIV1
/9
/10
/11
/12
/13
/14
/15
/16
83
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) peripherals
The device includes two multi-channel audio serial port (McASP) interface peripherals (McASP1 and McASP0).
The McASP is a serial port optimized for the needs of multi-channel audio applications. With two McASP
peripherals, the device is capable of supporting two completely independent audio zones simultaneously.
Each McASP consists of a transmit and receive section. These sections can operate completely independently
with different data formats, separate master clocks, bit clocks, and frame syncs or alternatively, the transmit and
receive sections may be synchronized. Each McASP module also includes a pool of 16 shift registers that may
be configured to operate as either transmit data, receive data, or general-purpose I/O (GPIO).
The transmit section of the McASP can transmit data in either a time-division-multiplexed (TDM) synchronous
serial format or in a digital audio interface (DIT) format where the bit stream is encoded for S/PDIF, AES-3,
IEC-60958, CP-430 transmission. The receive section of the McASP supports the TDM synchronous serial
format.
Each McASP can support one transmit data format (either a TDM format or DIT format) and one receive format
at a time. All transmit shift registers use the same format and all receive shift registers use the same format.
However, the transmit and receive formats need not be the same.
Both the transmit and receive sections of the McASP also support burst mode which is useful for non-audio data
(for example, passing control information between two DSPs).
The McASP peripherals have additional capability for flexible clock generation, and error detection/handling,
as well as error management.
McASP block diagram
Figure 16 illustrates the major blocks along with external signals of the McASP1 and McASP0 peripherals; and
shows the 8 serial data [AXR] pins for each McASP. Each McASP also includes full general-purpose I/O (GPIO)
control, so any pins not needed for serial transfers can be used for general-purpose I/O.
84
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) peripherals (continued)
McASP0
McASP1
Transmit
Transmit
DIT
RAM
DIT
RAM
Frame Sync
Generator
AFSX0
Frame Sync
Generator
AFSX1
Transmit
Clock Check
(High-
Transmit
Clock Check
(High-
Transmit
Clock
Generator
Transmit
Clock
Generator
AHCLKX0
ACLKX0
AHCLKX1
ACLKX1
Frequency)
Frequency)
AMUTE0
AMUTE1
Error
Error
Detect
Detect
AMUTEIN0
AMUTEIN1
Receive
Clock Check
(High-
Receive
Clock Check
(High-
Receive
Clock
Generator
Receive
Clock
Generator
AHCLKR0
ACLKR0
AHCLKR1
ACLKR1
Frequency)
Frequency)
Transmit
Data
Formatter
Receive
Frame Sync
Generator
Transmit
Data
Formatter
Receive
Frame Sync
Generator
AFSR0
AFSR1
Serializer 0
Serializer 0
AXR0[0]
AXR0[1]
AXR0[2]
AXR0[3]
AXR0[4]
AXR0[5]
AXR0[6]
AXR0[7]
AXR1[0]
AXR1[1]
AXR1[2]
AXR1[3]
AXR1[4]
AXR1[5]
AXR1[6]
AXR1[7]
Serializer 1
Serializer 2
Serializer 3
Serializer 4
Serializer 5
Serializer 6
Serializer 7
Serializer 1
Serializer 2
Serializer 3
Serializer 4
Serializer 5
Serializer 6
Serializer 7
Receive
Data
Formatter
Receive
Data
Formatter
GPIO
Control
GPIO
Control
Figure 16. McASP0 and McASP1 Configuration
85
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) peripherals (continued)
multichannel time division multiplexed (TDM) synchronous transfer mode
The McASP supports a multichannel, time-division-multiplexed (TDM) synchronous transfer mode for both
transmit and receive. Within this transfer mode, a wide variety of serial data formats are supported, including
formats compatible with devices using the Inter-Integrated Sound (IIS) protocol.
TDM synchronous transfer mode is typically used when communicating between integrated circuits such as
between a DSP and one or more ADC, DAC, CODEC, or S/PDIF receiver devices. In multichannel applications,
it is typical to find several devices operating synchronized with each other. For example, to provide six analog
outputs, three stereo DAC devices would be driven with the same bit clock and frame sync, but each stereo DAC
would use a different McASP serial data pin carrying stereo data (2 TDM time slots, left and right).
The TDM synchronous serial transfer mode utilizes several control signals and one or more serial data signals:
D
D
D
D
A bit clock signal (ACLKX for transmit, ACKLR for receive)
A frame sync signal (AFSX for transmit, AFSR for receive)
An (Optional) high frequency master clock (AHCLKX for transmit, AHCLKR for receive) from which the bit
clock is derived
One or more serial data pins (AXR for transmit and for receive).
Except for the optional high-frequency master clock, all of the signals in the TDM synchronous serial transfer
mode protocol are synchronous to the bit clocks (ACLKX and ACLKR).
In the TDM synchronous transfer mode, the McASP continually transmits and receives data periodically (since
audio ADCs and DACs operate at a fixed-data rate). The data is organized into frames, and the beginning of
a frame is marked by a frame sync pulse on the AFSX, AFSR pin.
In a typical audio system, one frame is transferred per sample period. To support multiple channels, the choices
are to either include more time slots per frame (and therefore operate with a higher bit clock) or to keep the bit
clock period constant and use additional data pins to transfer the same number of channels. For example, a
particular six-channel DAC might require three McASP serial data pins; transferring two channels of data on
each serial data pin during each sample period (frame). Another similar DAC may be designed to use only a
single McASP serial data pin, but clocked three times faster and transferring six channels of data per sample
period. The McASP is flexible enough to support either type of DAC but a transmitter cannot be configured to
do both at the same time.
For multiprocessor applications, the McASP supports any number of time slots per frame (between 2 and 32),
and includes the ability to “disable” transfers during specific time slots.
In addition, to support of S/PDIF, AES-3, IEC-60958, CP-430 receivers chips whose natural block (McASP
frame) size is 384 samples; the McASP receiver supports a 384 time slot mode. The advantage to using the
384 time slot mode is that interrupts may be generated synchronous to the S/PDIF, AES-3, IEC-60958, CP-430
receivers, for example the “last slot” interrupt.
burst transfer mode
The McASP also supports a burst transfer mode, which is useful for non-audio data (for example, passing
control information between two DSPs). Burst transfer mode uses a synchronous serial format similar to TDM,
except the frame sync is generated for each data word transferred. In addition, frame sync generation is not
periodic or time-driven as in TDM mode but rather data-driven.
86
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) peripherals (continued)
supported bit stream formats for TDM and burst transfer modes
The serial data pins support a wide variety of formats. In the TDM and burst synchronous modes, the data may
be transmitted / received with the following options:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Time slots per frame: 1 (Burst/Data Driven), or 2,3...32 (TDM/Time-Driven).
Time slot size: 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 bits per time slot
Data size: 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 bits (must be less than or equal to time slot)
Data alignment within time slot: Left- or Right-Justified
Bit order: MSB or LSB first.
Unused bits in time slot: Padded with 0, 1 or extended with value of another bit.
Time slot delay from frame sync: 0,1, or 2 bit delay
The data format can be programmed independently for transmit and receive, and for McASP0 vs. McASP1. In
addition, the McASP can automatically re-align the data as processed natively by the DSP (any format on a
nibble boundary) adjusting the data in hardware to any of the supported serial bit stream formats (TDM, Burst,
and DIT modes). This reduces the amount of bit manipulation that the DSP must perform and simplifies software
architecture.
digital audio interface transmitter (DIT) transfer mode (transmitter only)
The McASP transmit section may also be configured in digital audio interface transmitter (DIT) mode where it
outputs data formatted for transmission over an S/PDIF, AES-3, IEC-60958, or CP-430 standard link. These
standards encode the serial data such that the equivalent of ’clock’ and ’frame sync’ are embedded within the
data stream. DIT transfer mode is used as an interconnect between audio components and can transfer
multichannel digital audio data over a single optical or coaxial cable.
From an internal DSP standpoint, the McASP operation in DIT transfer mode is similar to the two time slot TDM
mode, but the data transmitted is output as a bi-phase mark encoded bit stream with preamble, channel status,
user data, validity, and parity automatically stuffed into the bit stream by the McASP module. The McASP
includes separate validity bits for even/odd subframes and two 384-bit register file modules to hold channel
status and user data bits.
DIT mode requires at minimum:
D
D
One serial data pin (if the AUXCLK is used as the reference [see the PLL and Clock Generator Logic
Figure 15]) or
One serial data pin plus either the AHCLKX or ACLKX pin (if an external clock is needed).
If additional serial data pins are used, each McASP may be used to transmit multiple encoded bit streams (one
per pin). However, the bit streams will all be synchronized to the same clock and the user data, channel status,
and validity information carried by each bit stream will be the same for all bit streams transmitted by the same
McASP module.
The McASP can also automatically re-align the data as processed by the DSP (any format on a nibble boundary)
in DIT mode; reducing the amount of bit manipulation that the DSP must perform and simplifies software
architecture.
87
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
multichannel audio serial port (McASP) peripherals (continued)
McASP flexible clock generators
The McASP transmit and receive clock generators are identical. Each clock generator can accept a
high-frequency master clock input (on the AHCLKX and AHCLKR pins).
The transmit and receive bit clocks (on the ACLKX and ACLKR pins) can also be sourced externally or can be
sourced internally by dividing down the high-frequency master clock input (programmable factor /1, /2, /3, ...
/4096). The polarity of each bit clock is individually programmable.
The frame sync pins are AFSX (transmit) and AFSR (receive). A typical usage for these pins is to carry the
left-right clock (LRCLK) signal when transmitting and receiving stereo data. The frame sync signals are
individually programmable for either internal or external generation, either bit or slot length, and either rising or
falling edge polarity.
Some examples of the things that a system designer can use the McASP clocking flexibility for are:
D
Input a high-frequency master clock (for example, 512f of the receiver), receive with an internally
s
generated bit clock ratio of /8, while transmitting with an internally generated bit clock ratio of /4 or /2. [An
example application would be to receive data from a DVD at 48 kHz but output up-sampled or decoded
audio at 96 kHz or 192 kHz.]
D
D
Transmit/receive data based one sample rate (for example, 44.1 kHz) using McASP0 while transmitting and
receiving at a different sample rate (for example, 48 kHz) on McASP1.
Use the DSP’s on-board AUXCLK to supply the system clock when the input source is an A/D converter.
McASP error handling and management
To support the design of a robust audio system, the McASP module includes error-checking capability for the
serial protocol, data underrun, and data overrun. In addition, each McASP includes a timer that continually
measures the high-frequency master clock every 32-SYSCLK2 clock cycles. The timer value can be read to
get a measurement of the high-frequency master clock frequency and has a min-max range setting that can
raise an error flag if the high-frequency master clock goes out of a specified range. The user would read the
high-frequency transmit master clock measurement (AHCLKX0 or AHCLKX1) by reading the XCNT field of the
XCLKCHK register and the user would read the high-frequency receive master clock measurement (AHCLKR0
or AHCLKR1) by reading the RCNT field of the RCLKCHK register.
Upon the detection of any one or more of the above errors (software selectable), or the assertion of the
AMUTE_IN pin, the AMUTE output pin may be asserted to a high or low level (selectable) to immediately mute
the audio output. In addition, an interrupt may be generated if enabled based on any one or more of the error
sources.
McASP interrupts and EDMA events
The McASP transmitter and receiver sections each generate an event on every time slot. This event can be
serviced by an interrupt or by the EDMA controller.
When using interrupts to service the McASP, each shift register buffer has a unique address in the McASP
Registers space (see Table 3).
When using the EDMA to service the McASP, the McASP DATA Port space in Table 3 is accessed. In this case,
the address least-significant bits are ignored. Writes to any address in this range access the transmitting buffers
in order from lowest (serializer 0) to highest (serializer 15), skipping over disabled and receiving serializers.
Likewise, reads from any address in this space access the receiving buffers in the same order but skip over
disabled and transmitting buffers.
88
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
I2C
Having two I2C modules on the TMS320C6713B simplifies system architecture, since one module may be used
by the DSP to control local peripherals ICs (DACs, ADCs, etc.) while the other may be used to communicate
with other controllers in a system or to implement a user interface.
The TMS320C6713B also includes two I2C serial ports for control purposes. Each I2C port supports:
2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Compatible with Philips I C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less
Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling
Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers
Figure 17 is a block diagram of the I2Cx module.
I2Cx Module
Clock
SYSCLK2
Prescale
From PLL
Clock Generator
I2CPSCx
Bit Clock
Control
Generator
SCL
Noise
Own
Address
I2C Clock
Filter
I2CCLKHx
I2CCLKLx
I2COARx
I2CSARx
I2CMDRx
I2CCNTx
Slave
Address
Mode
Transmit
I2CXSRx
Data
Count
Transmit
Shift
Transmit
Buffer
I2CDXRx
SDA
Interrupt/DMA
I2CIERx
Noise
Filter
I2C Data
Interrupt
Enable
Receive
Receive
Buffer
I2CDRRx
Interrupt
Status
I2CSTRx
Interrupt
Source
Receive
Shift
I2CRSRx
I2CISRCx
NOTE A: Shading denotes control/status registers.
Figure 17. I2Cx Module Block Diagram
89
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
general-purpose input/output (GPIO)
To use the GP[15:0] software-configurable GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP Enable (GPEN) Register and
the GPxDIR bits in the GP Direction (GPDIR) Register must be properly configured.
GPxEN =
GPxDIR =
GPxDIR =
1
0
1
GP[x] pin is enabled
GP[x] pin is an input
GP[x] pin is an output
where “x” represents one of the 15 through 0 GPIO pins
Figure 18 shows the GPIO enable bits in the GPEN register for the C6713B device. To use any of the GPx pins
as general-purpose input/output functions, the corresponding GPxEN bit must be set to “1” (enabled). Default
values are device-specific, so refer to Figure 18 for the C6713B default configuration.
31
24 23
Reserved
R-0
16
15
GP15 GP14 GP13 GP12 GP11 GP10
EN EN EN EN EN EN
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP9
EN
GP8
EN
GP7
EN
GP6
EN
GP5
EN
GP4
EN
GP3
EN
GP2
EN
GP1
EN
GP0
EN
R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 18. GPIO Enable Register (GPEN) [Hex Address: 01B0 0000]
Figure 19 shows the GPIO direction bits in the GPDIR register. This register determines if a given GPIO pin is
an input or an output providing the corresponding GPxEN bit is enabled (set to “1”) in the GPEN register. By
default, all the GPIO pins are configured as input pins.
31
24 23
Reserved
R-0
16
15
GP15 GP14 GP13 GP12 GP11 GP10
DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP9
DIR
GP8
DIR
GP7
DIR
GP6
DIR
GP5
DIR
GP4
DIR
GP3
DIR
GP2
DIR
GP1
DIR
GP0
DIR
R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 19. GPIO Direction Register (GPDIR) [Hex Address: 01B0 0004]
For more detailed information on general-purpose inputs/outputs (GPIOs), see the TMS320C6000 DSP
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU584).
90
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
power-down mode logic
Figure 20 shows the power-down mode logic on the C6713B.
CLKOUT2
Internal Clock Tree
Clock
Distribution
and Dividers
PD1
PD2
IFR
Power-
Down
Logic
Clock
PLL
Internal
Peripherals
IER
CSR
PWRD
CPU
PD3
TMS320C6713B
CLKIN
RESET
†
External input clocks, with the exception of CLKIN and CLKOUT3, are not gated by the power-down mode logic.
†
Figure 20. Power-Down Mode Logic
91
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
triggering, wake-up, and effects
The device includes a programmable PLL which allows software control of PLL bypass via the PLLEN bit in the
PLLCSR register. With this enhanced functionality come some additional considerations when entering
power−down modes.
The power−down modes (PD2 and PD3) function by disabling the PLL to stop clocks to the C6713 device.
However, if the PLL is bypassed (PLLEN = 0), the device will still receive clocks from the external clock input
(CLKIN). Therefore, bypassing the PLL makes the power−down modes PD2 and PD3 ineffective.
The PLL needs to be enabled by writing a “1” to PLLEN bit (PLLCSR.0) before being able to enter either PD3
(CSR.11) or PD2 (CSR.10) in order for these modes to have an effect.
For the TMS320C6713B device it is recommended to use the PLLPWDN bit (PLLCSR.1) to enter a deep
power−down state equivalent to PD3 since the PLLPWDN bit takes full advantage of the PLL power−down
feature.
The power−down modes (PD1, PD2, and PD3) and their wake−up methods are programmed by setting the
PWRD field (bits 15−10) of the control status register (CSR). The PWRD field of the CSR is shown in Figure 21
and described in Table 44. When writing to the CSR, all bits of the PWRD field should be set at the same time.
Logic 0 should be used when “writing” to the reserved bit (bit 15) of the PWRD field. The CSR is discussed in
detail in the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
31
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Enable or
Non-Enabled
Interrupt Wake
Enabled
Interrupt Wake
Reserved
R/W-0
PD3
PD2
PD1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
7
0
Legend: R/W−x = Read/write reset value
NOTE: The shadowed bits are not part of the power-down logic discussion and therefore are not covered here. For information on these other
bit fields in the CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
Figure 21. PWRD Field of the CSR Register
A delay of up to nine clock cycles may occur after the instruction that sets the PWRD bits in the CSR before the
PD mode takes effect. As best practice, NOPs should be padded after the PWRD bits are set in the CSR to account
for this delay.
If PD1 mode is terminated by a non-enabled interrupt, the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1
took effect. If PD1 mode is terminated by an enabled interrupt, the interrupt service routine will be executed first,
then the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect. In the case with an enabled interrupt,
92
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
the GIE bit in the CSR and the NMIE bit in the interrupt enable register (IER) must also be set in order for the
interrupt service routine to execute; otherwise, execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect upon
PD1 mode termination by an enabled interrupt.
PD2 and PD3 modes can only be aborted by device reset. Table 44 summarizes all the power-down modes.
Table 44. Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes
PRWD FIELD
(BITS 15−10)
POWER-DOWN
MODE
WAKE-UP METHOD
—
EFFECT ON CHIP’S OPERATION
000000
No power-down
PD1
—
CPU halted (except for the interrupt logic)
001001
Wake by an enabled interrupt
Power-down mode blocks the internal clock inputs at the
boundary of the CPU, preventing most of the CPU’s logic from
switching. During PD1, EDMA transactions can proceed
between peripherals and internal memory.
Wake by an enabled or
non-enabled interrupt
010001
PD1
Output clock from PLL is halted, stopping the internal clock
structure from switching and resulting in the entire chip being
halted. All register and internal RAM contents are preserved. All
functional I/O “freeze” in the last state when the PLL clock is
turned off.
†
PD2
011010
Wake by a device reset
Input clock to the PLL stops generating clocks. All register and
internal RAM contents are preserved. All functional I/O freeze in
the last state when the PLL clock is turned off. Following reset, the
PLL needs time to re−lock, just as it does following power−up.
Wake−up from PD3 takes longer than wake−up from PD2
because the PLL needs to be re−locked, just as it does following
power−up.
†
PD3
011100
Wake by a device reset
It is recommended to use the PLLPWDN bit (PLLCSR.1) as an
alternative to PD3.
All others
Reserved
—
—
†
When entering PD2 and PD3, all functional I/O remains in the previous state. However, for peripherals which are asynchronous in nature or
peripherals with an external clock source, output signals may transition in response to stimulus on the inputs. Under these conditions,
peripherals will not operate according to specifications.
power-supply sequencing
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply. However,
systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended periods of time
(>1 second) if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
system-level design considerations
System-level design considerations, such as bus contention, may require supply sequencing to be
implemented. In this case, the core supply should be powered up prior to (and powered down after), the I/O
buffers. This is to ensure that the I/O buffers receive valid inputs from the core before the output buffers are
powered up, thus, preventing bus contention with other chips on the board.
93
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
power-supply design considerations
A dual-power supply with simultaneous sequencing can be used to eliminate the delay between core and I/O
power up. A Schottky diode can also be used to tie the core rail to the I/O rail (see Figure 22).
I/O Supply
DV
DD
Schottky
Diode
C6000
DSP
Core Supply
CV
DD
V
SS
GND
Figure 22. Schottky Diode Diagram
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance
applications utilizing the C6000 platform of DSPs, the PC board should include separate power planes for
core, I/O, and ground, all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
power-supply decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as possible
close to the DSP. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total of 60 caps — 30 for the core supply
and 30 for the I/O supply. These caps need to be close (no more than 1.25 cm maximum distance) to the DSP
to be effective. Physically smaller caps are better, such as 0402, but the size needs to be evaluated from a
yield/manufacturing point-of-view. Parasitic inductance limits the effectiveness of the decoupling capacitors,
therefore physically smaller capacitors should be used while maintaining the largest available capacitance
value. As with the selection of any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production
lifetime needs to be considered.
94
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement
The TMS320C6713B DSP requires that both TRST and RESET resets be asserted upon power up to be
properly initialized. While RESET initializes the DSP core, TRST initializes the DSP’s emulation logic. Both
resets are required for proper operation.
Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by TCLK; otherwise, BSCAN may not respond as expected
after TRST is asserted.
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for the
DSP to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG port interface
and DSP’s emulation logic in the reset state. TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG
controller to debug the DSP or exercise the DSP’s boundary scan functionality.
The TMS320C6713B DSP includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST will always
be asserted upon power up and the DSP’s internal emulation logic will always be properly initialized when this
pin is not routed out. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some
third-party JTAG controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of an external pullup resistor on TRST.
When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to initialize the DSP after powerup and externally drive
TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations.
Following the release of RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must be “seen” to latch the state of EMU1
and EMU0. The EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Emulation mode. For
more detailed information, see the terminal functions section of this data sheet.
Note: The DESIGN−WARNING section of the TMS320C6713B BSDL file contains information and constraints
regarding proper device operation while in Boundary Scan Mode.
For more detailed information on the C6713B JTAG emulation, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Designing for JTAG
Emulation Reference Guide (literature number SPRU641).
EMIF device speed
The maximum EMIF speed on the C6713B device is 100 MHz. TI recommends utilizing I/O buffer information
specification (IBIS) to analyze all AC timings to determine if the maximum EMIF speed is achievable for a given
board layout. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using
IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839).
For ease of design evaluation, Table 45 contains IBIS simulation results showing the maximum EMIF-SDRAM
interface speeds for the given example boards (TYPE) and SDRAM speed grades. Timing analysis should be
performed to verify that all AC timings are met for the specified board layout. Other configurations are also
possible, but again, timing analysis must be done to verify proper AC timings.
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines (see
the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).
95
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
Table 45. C6713B Example Boards and Maximum EMIF Speed
BOARD CONFIGURATION
MAXIMUM ACHIEVABLE
EMIF-SDRAM
SDRAM SPEED GRADE
EMIF INTERFACE
TYPE
BOARD TRACE
COMPONENTS
INTERFACE SPEED
143 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−7)
166 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−6)
100 MHz
For short traces, SDRAM data
output hold time on these
SDRAM speed grades cannot
meet EMIF input hold time
requirement (see NOTE 1).
1 to 3-inch traces with proper
termination resistors;
Trace impedance ~ 50 Ω
1-Load
Short Traces
One bank of one
32-Bit SDRAM
183 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−55)
200 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−5)
125 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−8E)
133 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−75)
143 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−7E)
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6A)
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6)
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
1.2 to 3 inches from EMIF to
each load, with proper
termination resistors;
2-Loads
Short Traces
One bank of two
16-Bit SDRAMs
Trace impedance ~ 78 Ω
For short traces, EMIF cannot
meet SDRAM input hold
125 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−8E)
requirement (see NOTE 1).
1.2 to 3 inches from EMIF to
each load, with proper
termination resistors;
133 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−75)
143 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−7E)
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6A)
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
One bank of two
16-Bit SDRAMs
One bank of buffer
3-Loads
Short Traces
Trace impedance ~ 78 Ω
For short traces, EMIF cannot
meet SDRAM input hold
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6)
requirement (see NOTE 1).
143 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−7)
166 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−6)
183 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−55)
83 MHz
83 MHz
83 MHz
One bank of one
32-Bit SDRAM
One bank of one
32-Bit SBSRAM
One bank of buffer
3-Loads
Long Traces
4 to 7 inches from EMIF;
Trace impedance ~ 63 Ω
SDRAM data output hold time
cannot meet EMIF input hold
requirement (see NOTE 1).
200 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−5)
NOTE 1: Results are based on IBIS simulations for the given example boards (TYPE). Timing analysis should be performed to determine if timing
requirements can be met for the particular system.
96
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
EMIF big endian mode correctness
The HD8 pin device endian mode (LENDIAN) selects the endian mode of operation (Little or Big Endian). For
the C6713B device Little Endian is the default setting.
The HD12 pin (EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness) [EMIFBE] enhancement allows the flexibility to change the
EMIF data placement on the EMIF bus.
When using the default setting of HD12 = 1 for the C6713B, the EMIF will present 8-bit or 16-bit data on the
ED[7:0] side of the bus if using Little Endian mode (HD8 = 1) and to the ED[31:24] side of the bus if using Big
Endian mode. Figure 23 shows the mapping of 16-bit and 8-bit C6713B devices.
EMIF DATA LINES (PINS) WHERE DATA PRESENT
ED[31:24] (BE3)
ED[23:16] (BE2)
32-Bit Device in Any Endianness Mode
16-Bit Device in Big Endianness Mode 16-Bit Device in Little Endianness Mode
ED[15:8] (BE1)
ED[7:0] (BE0)
8-Bit Device in Big
Endianness Mode
8-Bit Device in Little Endianness Mode
Figure 23. 16/8-Bit EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness Mapping (HD12 = 1)
When HD12 = 0, enabling EMIF endianness correction, the EMIF will present 8-bit or 16-bit data on the ED[7:0]
side of the bus, regardless of the endianess mode (see Figure 24).
EMIF DATA LINES (PINS) WHERE DATA PRESENT
ED[31:24] (BE3)
ED[23:16] (BE2)
32-Bit Device in Any Endianness Mode
16-Bit Device in Any Endianness Mode
8-Bit Device in Any Endianness Mode
ED[15:8] (BE1)
ED[7:0] (BE0)
Figure 24. 16/8-Bit EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness Mapping (HD12 = 0)
This new endianness correction functionality does not affect systems using the default value of HD12 = 1.
This new feature does not affect systems operating in Little Endian mode.
97
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
bootmode
The device resets using the active-low signal RESET and the internal reset signal. While RESET is low, the
internal reset is also asserted and the device is held in reset and is initialized to the prescribed reset state. Refer
to reset timing for reset timing characteristics and states of device pins during reset. The release of the internal
reset signal (see the Reset Phase 3 discussion in the Reset Timing section of this data sheet) starts the
processor running with the prescribed device configuration and boot mode.
The C6713B has three types of boot modes:
D
Host boot
If host boot is selected, upon release of internal reset, the CPU is internally “stalled” while the remainder of
the device is released. During this period, an external host can initialize the CPU’s memory space as
necessary through the host interface, including internal configuration registers, such as those that control
the EMIF or other peripherals. Once the host is finished with all necessary initialization, it must set the
DSPINT bit in the HPIC register to complete the boot process. This transition causes the boot configuration
logic to bring the CPU out of the “stalled” state. The CPU then begins execution from address 0. The DSPINT
condition is not latched by the CPU, because it occurs while the CPU is still internally “stalled”. Also, DSPINT
brings the CPU out of the “stalled” state only if the host boot process is selected. All memory may be written
to and read by the host. This allows for the host to verify what it sends to the DSP if required. After the CPU is
out of the “stalled” state , the CPU needs to clear the DSPINT, otherwise, no more DSPINTs can be received.
D
D
Emulation boot
Emulation boot mode is a variation of host boot. In this mode, it is not necessary for a host to load code or to
set DSPINT to release the CPU from the “stalled” state. Instead, the emulator will set DSPINT if it has not
been previously set so that the CPU can begin executing code from address 0. Prior to beginning execution,
the emulator sets a breakpoint at address 0. This prevents the execution of invalid code by halting the CPU
prior to executing the first instruction. Emulation boot is a good tool in the debug phase of development.
EMIF boot (using default ROM timings)
Upon the release of internal reset, the 1K-Byte ROM code located in the beginning of CE1 is copied to
address 0 by the EDMA using the default ROM timings, while the CPU is internally “stalled”. The data should
be stored in the endian format that the system is using. The boot process also lets you choose the width of
the ROM. In this case, the EMIF automatically assembles consecutive 8-bit bytes or 16-bit half-words to
form the 32-bit instruction words to be copied. The transfer is automatically done by the EDMA as a
single-frame block transfer from the ROM to address 0. After completion of the block transfer, the CPU is
released from the “stalled” state and start running from address 0.
reset
A hardware reset (RESET) is required to place the DSP into a known good state out of power−up. The RESET
signal can be asserted (pulled low) prior to ramping the core and I/O voltages or after the core and I/O voltages
have reached their proper operating conditions. As a best practice, reset should be held low during power−up.
Prior to deasserting RESET (low−to−high transition), the core and I/O voltages should be at their proper
operating conditions and CLKIN should also be running at the correct frequency.
98
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
†
absolute maximum ratings over operating case temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
Supply voltage range, CV
Supply voltage range, DV
(see Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 1.8 V
(see Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
DD
DD
Input voltage range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to DV
Output voltage range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to DV
+ 0.5 V
+ 0.5 V
DD
DD
Operating case temperature ranges, T : (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0_C to 90_C
C
(A version) [GDPA/ZDPA-200, PYPA-167,-200] −40_C to105_C
Storage temperature range, T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65_C to 150_C
stg
†
Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTE 2: All voltage values are with respect to V
SS
.
†
recommended operating conditions
MIN
NOM
MAX
1.32
1.32
1.47
3.47
UNIT
PYP packages only
1.14
1.20
V
V
V
V
‡
1.14
‡
1.20
GDP/ZDP packages for C6713B only
GDP/ZDP packages for C6713B−300 only
CV
DV
Supply voltage, Core referenced to V
SS
DD
DD
1.33
3.13
1.4
3.3
Supply voltage, I/O referenced to V
SS
All signals except CLKS1/SCL1,
DR1/SDA1, SCL0, SDA0, and RESET
2
2
V
V
V
V
V
High-level input voltage (See Figure 28)
Low-level input voltage (See Figure 29)
IH
CLKS1/SCL1, DR1/SDA1, SCL0, SDA0,
and RESET
All signals except CLKS1/SCL1,
DR1/SDA1, SCL0, SDA0, and RESET
0.8
V
IL
CLKS1/SCL1, DR1/SDA1, SCL0, SDA0,
and RESET
0.3*DV
DD
All signals except ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2,
CLKS1/SCL1, DR1/SDA1, SCL0, and
SDA0
−8
mA
mA
mA
§
High-level output current
I
I
OH
ECLKOUT and CLKOUT2
−16
8
All signals except ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2,
CLKS1/SCL1, DR1/SDA1, SCL0, and
SDA0
§
Low-level output current
OL
ECLKOUT and CLKOUT2
16
3
mA
mA
CLKS1/SCL1, DR1/SDA1, SCL0, and
SDA0
¶
V
V
Maximum voltage during overshoot (See Figure 28)
Maximum voltage during undershoot (See Figure 29)
Default
4
V
V
OS
¶
−0.7
US
0
90
105
T
C
Operating case temperature
_C
A version (GDPA/ZDPA -200,
PYPA-167,−200)
–40
†
The core supply should be powered up prior to (and powered down after), the I/O supply. Systems should be designed to ensure that neither
supply is powered up for an extended period of time if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
These values are compatible with existing 1.26-V designs.
Refers to DC (or steady state) currents only, actual switching currents are higher. For more details, see the device-specific IBIS models.
The absolute maximum ratings should not be exceeded for more than 30% of the cycle period.
‡
§
¶
99
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case
†
temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
High-level output
voltage
All signals except SCL1, SDA1,
SCL0, and SDA0
V
I
=MAX
2.4
V
OH
OL
OH
All signals except SCL1, SDA1,
SCL0, and SDA0
I
I
= MAX
= MAX
0.4
0.4
170
10
V
V
Low-level output
voltage
OL
V
SCL1, SDA1, SCL0, and SDA0
OL
All signals except SCL1, SDA1,
SCL0, and SDA0
uA
uA
uA
uA
mA
I
I
Input current
V = V
SS
to DV
DD
I
I
SCL1, SDA1, SCL0, and SDA0
All signals except SCL1, SDA1,
SCL0, and SDA0
170
10
Off-state output
current
V
= DV or 0 V
DD
OZ
O
SCL1, SDA1, SCL0, and SDA0
GDP/ZDP, CV
DD
CPU clock = 300 MHz
= 1.4 V,
945
625
560
565
GDP/ZDP/PYP, CV
1.26 V, CPU clock = 225
MHz
=
DD
mA
mA
mA
GDPA/ZDPA, CV
CPU clock = 200 MHz
=1.26V
DD
‡
I
DD2V
Core supply current
GDPA/ZDPA/PYP/ PYPA
CV
200 MHz
=1.2 V CPU clock =
DD
PYPA, CV
clock = 167 MHz
=1.2 V CPU
DD
480
75
mA
mA
DV = 3.3 V, EMIF speed
DD
= 100 MHz
‡
I
DD3V
I/O supply current
C
C
Input capacitance
7
7
pF
pF
i
Output capacitance
o
†
‡
For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
Measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power) at 25°C case temperature and 100-MHz EMIF. This model represents a device
performing high-DSP-activity operations 50% of the time, and the remainder performing low-DSP-activity operations. The high/low-DSP-activity
models are defined as follows:
High-DSP-Activity Model:
CPU: 8 instructions/cycle with 2 LDDW instructions [L1 Data Memory: 128 bits/cycle via LDDW instructions;
L1 Program Memory: 256 bits/cycle; L2/EMIF EDMA: 50% writes, 50% reads to/from SDRAM (50% bit-switching)]
McBSP: 2 channels at E1 rate
Timers: 2 timers at maximum rate
Low-DSP-Activity Model:
CPU: 2 instructions/cycle with 1 LDH instruction [L1 Data Memory: 16 bits/cycle; L1 Program Memory: 256 bits per 4 cycles;
L2/EMIF EDMA: None]
McBSP: 2 channels at E1 rate
Timers: 2 timers at maximum rate
The actual current draw is highly application-dependent. For more details on core and I/O activity, refer to the TMS320C6711D, C6712D, C6713B
Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA889A2 or later).
100
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
Tester Pin Electronics
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
42 W
3.5 nH
Output
Under
Test
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 W
(see note)
Device Pin
(see note)
4.0 pF
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect.
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from
the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 25. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
signal transition levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to 1.5 V for both “0” and “1” logic levels.
V
ref
= 1.5 V
Figure 26. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to V MAX and V MIN for input clocks, V MAX
IL
IH
OL
and V
MIN for output clocks.
OH
V
= V MIN (or V
IH OH
MIN)
MAX)
ref
V
ref
= V MAX (or V
IL OL
Figure 27. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
101
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
AC transient rise/fall time specifications
Figure 28 and Figure 29 show the AC transient specifications for Rise and Fall Time. For device-specific
information on these values, refer to the Recommended Operating Conditions section of this Data Sheet.
†
t = 0.3 t (max)
c
V
OS
(max)
Minimum
Risetime
V
IH
(min)
Waveform
Valid Region
Ground
Figure 28. AC Transient Specification Rise Time
†
t = the peripheral cycle time.
c
†
t = 0.3 t (max)
c
V
IL
(max)
V
US
(max)
Ground
Figure 29. AC Transient Specification Fall Time
†
t = the peripheral cycle time.
c
102
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
timing parameters and board routing analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a good
board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be adjusted by
increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer information specification
(IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate
timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature
number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any timing
differences.
For inputs, timing is most impacted by the round-trip propagation delay from the DSP to the external device and
from the external device to the DSP. This round-trip delay tends to negatively impact the input setup time margin,
but also tends to improve the input hold time margins (see Table 46 and Figure 30).
Figure 30 represents a general transfer between the DSP and an external device. The figure also represents
board route delays and how they are perceived by the DSP and the external device.
103
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
Table 46. Board-Level Timings Example (see Figure 30)
NO.
1
DESCRIPTION
Clock route delay
2
Minimum DSP hold time
3
Minimum DSP setup time
External device hold time requirement
External device setup time requirement
Control signal route delay
External device hold time
4
5
6
7
8
External device access time
DSP hold time requirement
DSP setup time requirement
Data route delay
9
10
11
ECLKOUT
(Output from DSP)
1
ECLKOUT
(Input to External Device)
2
3
†
Control Signals
(Output from DSP)
4
5
6
Control Signals
(Input to External Device)
7
8
‡
Data Signals
(Output from External Device)
9
10
11
‡
Data Signals
(Input to DSP)
† Control signals include data for Writes.
‡ Data signals are generated during Reads from an external device.
Figure 30. Board-Level Input/Output Timings
104
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS
†‡§
timing requirements for CLKIN for PYP-200 and GDP/ZDP-225
(see Figure 31)
PYP−200
GDP/ZDP−225
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
NO.
UNIT
MIN
5
MAX
MIN
6.7
MAX
MIN
4.4
MAX
MIN
6.7
MAX
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKIN
83.3
83.3
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(CLKIN)
w(CLKINH)
w(CLKINL)
t(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
Transition time, CLKIN
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
5
5
5
5
†
‡
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V MIN.
C = CLKIN cycle time in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKIN frequency is 40 MHz, use C = 25 ns.
See the PLL and PLL controller section of this data sheet.
IL
IH
†‡§
timing requirements for CLKIN for PYP-225 and GDP/ZDP-300
(see Figure 31)
PYP−225
GDP/ZDP−300
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4.4
MAX
MIN
6.7
MAX
MIN
4
MAX
MIN
6.7
MAX
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKIN
83.3
83.3
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(CLKIN)
w(CLKINH)
w(CLKINL)
t(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
Transition time, CLKIN
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
5
5
5
5
†
‡
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V MIN.
C = CLKIN cycle time in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKIN frequency is 40 MHz, use C = 25 ns.
See the PLL and PLL controller section of this data sheet.
IL
IH
†‡§
timing requirements for CLKIN for PYPA-167, GDPA/ZDPA-200 and PYPA-200
(see Figure 31)
PYPA−167
GDPA/ZDPA−200 AND PYPA−200
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
NO.
UNIT
MIN
6
MAX
MIN
6.7
MAX
MIN
5
MAX
MIN
6.7
MAX
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKIN
83.3
83.3
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(CLKIN)
w(CLKINH)
w(CLKINL)
t(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
Transition time, CLKIN
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
5
5
5
5
†
‡
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V MIN.
C = CLKIN cycle time in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKIN frequency is 40 MHz, use C = 25 ns.
See the PLL and PLL controller section of this data sheet.
IL
IH
1
4
2
CLKIN
3
4
Figure 31. CLKIN Timings
105
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
†‡
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT2
(see Figure 32)
PYP −200, −225
GDP/ZDP −225, -300
PYPA −167, -200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MIN
MAX
C2 + 0.8
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKOUT2
C2 − 0.8
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(CKO2)
w(CKO2H)
w(CKO2L)
t(CKO2)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 high
Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 low
Transition time, CLKOUT2
(C2/2) − 0.8 (C2/2) + 0.8
(C2/2) − 0.8 (C2/2) + 0.8
2
†
‡
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V
C2 = CLKOUT2 period in ns. CLKOUT2 period is determined by the PLL controller output SYSCLK2 period, which must be set to CPU period
MAX and V MIN.
OH
OL
divide-by-2.
1
4
2
CLKOUT2
3
4
Figure 32. CLKOUT2 Timings
†§
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT3
(see Figure 33)
PYP −200, −225
GDP/ZDP −225, -300
PYPA −167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
C3 + 0.9
1
2
3
4
5
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKOUT3
C3 − 0.9
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(CKO3)
w(CKO3H)
w(CKO3L)
t(CKO3)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 high
Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 low
Transition time, CLKOUT3
(C3/2) − 0.9 (C3/2) + 0.9
(C3/2) − 0.9 (C3/2) + 0.9
3
t
Delay time, CLKIN high to CLKOUT3 valid
1.5
7.5
d(CLKINH-CKO3V)
†
§
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V
C3 = CLKOUT3 period in ns. CLKOUT3 period is a divide-down of the CPU clock, configurable via the OSCDIV1 register. For more details, see
PLL and PLL controller.
MAX and V MIN.
OH
OL
CLKIN
5
1
5
4
3
CLKOUT3
2
4
NOTE A: For this example, the CLKOUT3 frequency is CLKIN divide-by-2.
Figure 33. CLKOUT3 Timings
106
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
†
timing requirements for ECLKIN (see Figure 34)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
10
MAX
1
2
3
4
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, ECLKIN
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(EKI)
Pulse duration, ECLKIN high
Pulse duration, ECLKIN low
Transition time, ECLKIN
4.5
4.5
w(EKIH)
w(EKIL)
t(EKI)
3
†
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V MAX and V MIN.
IL IH
1
4
2
ECLKIN
3
4
Figure 34. ECLKIN Timings
‡§#
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for ECLKOUT
(see Figure 35)
PYP−200, -225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
t
t
t
t
t
t
Cycle time, ECLKOUT
E − 0.9
E + 0.9
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
c(EKO)
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT high
EH − 0.9 EH + 0.9
EL − 0.9 EL + 0.9
2
w(EKOH)
w(EKOL)
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT low
Transition time, ECLKOUT
t(EKO)
Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT high
Delay time, ECLKIN low to ECLKOUT low
1
1
6.5
6.5
d(EKIH-EKOH)
d(EKIL-EKOL)
‡
§
¶
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V
E = ECLKIN period in ns
EH is the high period of ECLKIN in ns and EL is the low period of ECLKIN in ns.
MAX and V MIN.
OH
OL
ECLKIN
6
1
4
4
2
5
3
ECLKOUT
Figure 35. ECLKOUT Timings
107
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING
†‡§
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles
(see Figure 36−Figure 37)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA −167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
6.5
1
MAX
3
4
6
7
t
t
t
t
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high
ns
ns
ns
ns
su(EDV-AREH)
h(AREH-EDV)
su(ARDY-EKOH)
h(EKOH-ARDY)
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUT high
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUT high
3
2.3
†
To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. The ARDY signal is recognized in
the cycle for which the setup and hold time is met. To use ARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width of the ARDY signal should be wide
enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup and hold time is met.
‡
§
RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
E = ECLKOUT period in ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory
द
cycles
(see Figure 36−Figure 37)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
RS*E − 1.7
RH*E − 1.7
1.5
MAX
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE valid
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
osu(SELV-AREL)
oh(AREH-SELIV)
d(EKOH-AREV)
osu(SELV-AWEL)
oh(AWEH-SELIV)
d(EKOH-AWEV)
5
7
7
8
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals and EDx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE valid
WS*E − 1.7
WH*E − 1.7
1.5
9
10
(WS−1)*E −
1.7
11
t
Output setup time, ED valid to AWE low
ns
osu(EDV-AWEL)
‡
RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
E = ECLKOUT period in ns
§
¶
Select signals include: CEx, BE[3:0], EA[21:2], and AOE.
108
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Not Ready
Hold = 2
ECLKOUT
CEx
1
1
1
2
2
2
BE[3:0]
EA[21:2]
BE
Address
3
4
ED[31:0]
1
5
2
5
Read Data
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
†
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
7
7
6
6
ARDY
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 36. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing
109
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
Setup = 2
Hold = 2
Strobe = 3
Not Ready
ECLKOUT
CEx
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
BE[3:0]
BE
EA[21:2]
ED[31:0]
Address
Write Data
11
†
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
10
10
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
7
7
6
6
ARDY
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 37. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing
110
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS-BURST MEMORY TIMING
†
timing requirements for synchronous-burst SRAM cycles (see Figure 38)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
1.5
MAX
6
7
t
t
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
ns
ns
su(EDV-EKOH)
2.5
h(EKOH-EDV)
†
The C6713B SBSRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SBSRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word bursts,
but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous-burst SRAM
†‡
cycles (see Figure 38 and Figure 39)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
-167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MIN
MAX
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
1.2
7
7
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
d(EKOH-CEV)
d(EKOH-BEV)
d(EKOH-BEIV)
d(EKOH-EAV)
d(EKOH-EAIV)
d(EKOH-ADSV)
d(EKOH-OEV)
d(EKOH-EDV)
d(EKOH-EDIV)
d(EKOH-WEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
3
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
1.2
4
7
5
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
1.2
1.2
1.2
8
7
7
7
9
10
11
12
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1.2
1.2
7
†
‡
The C6713B SBSRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SBSRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word bursts,
but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
111
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS-BURST MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
2
3
BE1
BE2
BE3
EA
BE4
7
BE[3:0]
4
5
EA[21:2]
ED[31:0]
6
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
8
8
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
9
9
†
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
Figure 38. SBSRAM Read Timing
ECLKOUT
1
2
1
3
CEx
BE[3:0]
BE1
BE2
Q2
BE3
5
BE4
Q4
4
EA[21:2]
ED[31:0]
EA
10
11
12
Q1
Q3
8
8
†
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
12
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
Figure 39. SBSRAM Write Timing
112
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING
†
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles (see Figure 40)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN MAX
6
7
t
t
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
1.5
2.5
ns
ns
su(EDV-EKOH)
h(EKOH-EDV)
†
The C6713B SDRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SDRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word bursts,
but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM
†‡
cycles (see Figure 40−Figure 46)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
2
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
1.5
7
7
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
d(EKOH-CEV)
d(EKOH-BEV)
d(EKOH-BEIV)
d(EKOH-EAV)
d(EKOH-EAIV)
d(EKOH-CASV)
d(EKOH-EDV)
d(EKOH-EDIV)
d(EKOH-WEV)
d(EKOH-RAS)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
3
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
1.5
4
7
5
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
1.5
1.5
8
7
7
9
10
11
12
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
1.5
1.5
1.5
7
7
†
‡
The C6713B SDRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SDRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word bursts,
but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
113
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
READ
ECLKOUT
CEx
1
1
2
3
BE[3:0]
BE1
BE2
BE3
BE4
4
5
5
5
Bank
EA[21:13]
EA[11:2]
4
Column
4
EA12
6
7
D2
ED[31:0]
D1
D3
D4
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
8
8
†
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 40. SDRAM Read Command (CAS Latency 3)
114
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
WRITE
ECLKOUT
CEx
1
2
4
4
4
9
1
2
5
5
5
9
3
BE[3:0]
BE1
Bank
BE2
BE3
BE4
EA[21:13]
Column
EA[11:2]
EA12
10
ED[31:0]
D1
D2
D3
D4
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
8
8
†
11
11
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 41. SDRAM Write Command
115
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
ACTV
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
4
5
5
5
Bank Activate
EA[21:13]
EA[11:2]
4
Row Address
4
Row Address
EA12
ED[31:0]
12
12
†
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 42. SDRAM ACTV Command
DCAB
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
EA[21:13, 11:2]
4
12
11
5
12
11
EA12
ED[31:0]
†
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 43. SDRAM DCAB Command
116
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
DEAC
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
4
5
EA[21:13]
EA[11:2]
Bank
4
5
EA12
ED[31:0]
12
11
12
11
†
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 44. SDRAM DEAC Command
REFR
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
EA[21:2]
EA12
ED[31:0]
12
8
12
8
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
†
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 45. SDRAM REFR Command
117
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
MRS
ECLKOUT
1
1
5
CEx
BE[3:0]
4
EA[21:2]
ED[31:0]
MRS value
12
8
12
8
†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
†
11
11
†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 46. SDRAM MRS Command
118
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
HOLD/HOLDA TIMING
†
timing requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles (see Figure 47)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN MAX
3
t
Hold time, HOLD low after HOLDA low
E
ns
h(HOLDAL-HOLDL)
E = ECLKOUT period in ns
†
†‡
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles
(see Figure 47)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
2E
0
MAX
1
2
4
5
t
t
t
t
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIF Bus high impedance
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance
Delay time, EMIF Bus low impedance to HOLDA high
§
2E
7E
2E
ns
ns
ns
ns
d(HOLDL-EMHZ)
d(EMHZ-HOLDAL)
d(HOLDH-EMLZ)
d(EMLZ-HOLDAH)
2E
0
†
‡
§
E = ECLKOUT period in ns
EMIF Bus consists of CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ED[31:0], EA[21:2], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE.
All pending EMIF transactions are allowed to complete before HOLDA is asserted. If no bus transactions are occurring, then the minimum delay
time can be achieved. Also, bus hold can be indefinitely delayed by setting NOHOLD = 1.
External Requestor
DSP Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
Owns Bus
3
HOLD
2
5
HOLDA
1
4
†
EMIF Bus
C6713B
C6713B
†
EMIF Bus consists of CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ED[31:0], EA[21:2], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE.
Figure 47. HOLD/HOLDA Timing
119
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
BUSREQ TIMING
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the BUSREQ cycles
(see Figure 48)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
-167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MIN
MAX
7.2
1
t
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BUSREQ valid
1.5
ns
d(EKOH-BUSRV)
ECLKOUT
BUSREQ
1
1
Figure 48. BUSREQ Timing
120
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
RESET TIMING
†‡
timing requirements for reset (see Figure 49)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
100
2P
MAX
1
t
t
t
Pulse duration, RESET
Setup time, HD boot configuration bits valid before RESET high
ns
ns
ns
w(RST)
su(HD)
h(HD)
§
13
14
§
Hold time, HD boot configuration bits valid after RESET high
2P
†
‡
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For the C6713B device, the PLL is bypassed immediately after the device comes out of reset. The PLL Controller can be programmed to change
the PLL mode in software. For more detailed information on the PLL Controller, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Phase-Lock Loop (PLL) Controller
Peripheral Reference Guide (literature number SPRU233).
The Boot and device configurations bits are latched asynchronously when RESET is transitioning high. The Boot and device configurations bits
consist of: HD[14, 8, 4:3].
§
¶
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during reset (see Figure 49)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA-167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Delay time, external RESET high to internal reset high and
all signal groups valid
512 x CLKIN
period
2
t
CLKMODE0 = 1
ns
d(RSTH-ZV)
#||
3
4
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKOUT high impedance
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKOUT valid
0
0
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
d(RSTL-ECKOL)
d(RSTH-ECKOV)
d(RSTL-CKO2IV)
d(RSTH-CKO2V)
d(RSTL-CKO3L)
d(RSTH-CKO3V)
6P
6P
6P
5
Delay time, RESET low to CLKOUT2 high impedance
Delay time, RESET high to CLKOUT2 valid
6
7
Delay time, RESET low to CLKOUT3 low
8
Delay time, RESET high to CLKOUT3 valid
||
9
t
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z group high impedance
0
0
0
0
d(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)
||
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group (BUSREQ) invalid
10
11
12
t
d(RSTL-EMIFLIV)
||
t
Delay time, RESET low to Z group 1 high impedance
Delay time, RESET low to Z group 2 high impedance
d(RSTL-Z1HZ)
||
t
d(RSTL-Z2HZ)
¶
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns.
Note that while internal reset is asserted low, the CPU clock (SYSCLK1) period is equal to the input clock (CLKIN) period multiplied by 8. For
example, if the CLKIN period is 20 ns, then the CPU clock (SYSCLK1) period is 20 ns x 8 = 160 ns. Therefore, P = SYSCLK1 = 160 ns while
internal reset is asserted.
#
||
The internal reset is stretched exactly 512 x CLKIN cycles if CLKIN is used (CLKMODE0 = 1). If the input clock (CLKIN) is not stable when RESET
is deasserted, the actual delay time may vary.
EMIF Z group consists of: EA[21:2], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE and
HOLDA
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ
Z group 1 consists of:
CLKR0/ACLKR0, CLKR1/AXR0[6], CLKX0/ACLKX0, CLKX1/AMUTE0, FSR0/AFSR0, FSR1/AXR0[7],
FSX0/AFSX0, FSX1, DX0/AXR0[1], DX1/AXR0[5], TOUT0/AXR0[2], TOUT1/AXR0[4], SDA0 and SCL0.
All other HPI, McASP0/1, GPIO, and I2C1 signals.
Z group 2 consists of:
121
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
RESET TIMING (CONTINUED)
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
CLKIN
ECLKIN
1
RESET
2
Internal Reset
Internal SYSCLK1
Internal SYSCLK2
Internal SYSCLK3
3
4
6
ECLKOUT
5
CLKOUT2
7
8
CLKOUT3
9
2
2
†
EMIF Z Group
10
11
12
†
EMIF Low Group
2
2
†
Z Group 1
Z Group 2
†
14
13
Boot and Device
Configuration Pins‡
†
‡
EMIF Z group consists of: EA[21:2], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE and
HOLDA
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ
Z group 1 consists of:
CLKR0/ACLKR0, CLKR1/AXR0[6], CLKX0/ACLKX0, CLKX1/AMUTE0, FSR0/AFSR0, FSR1/AXR0[7],
FSX0/AFSX0, FSX1, DX0/AXR0[1], DX1/AXR0[5], TOUT0/AXR0[2], TOUT1/AXR0[4], SDA0 and SCL0.
All other HPI, McASP0/1, GPIO, and I2C1 signals.
Z group 2 consists of:
Boot and device configurations consist of: HD[14, 8, 4:3].
Figure 49. Reset Timing
Reset Phase 1: The RESET pin is asserted. During this time, all internal clocks are running at the CLKIN
frequency divide-by-8. The CPU is also running at the CLKIN frequency divide-by-8.
Reset Phase 2: The RESET pin is deasserted but the internal reset is stretched. During this time, all internal
clocks are running at the CLKIN frequency divide-by-8. The CPU is also running at the CLKIN frequency
divide-by-8.
Reset Phase 3: Both the RESET pin and internal reset are deasserted. During this time, all internal clocks are
running at their default divide-down frequency of CLKIN. The CPU clock (SYSCLK1) is running at CLKIN
frequency. The peripheral clock (SYSCLK2) is running at CLKIN frequency divide-by-2. The EMIF internal clock
source (SYSCLK3) is running at CLKIN frequency divide-by-2. SYSCLK3 is reflected on the ECLKOUT pin
(when EKSRC bit = 0 [default]). CLKOUT3 is running at CLKIN frequency divide-by-8.
122
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING
†
timing requirements for external interrupts (see Figure 50)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
2P
4P
2P
4P
MAX
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse low
ns
ns
ns
ns
1
2
t
t
w(ILOW)
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse low
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse high
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse high
w(IHIGH)
†
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
2
1
EXT_INT, NMI
Figure 50. External/NMI Interrupt Timing
123
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT (McASP) TIMING
timing requirements for McASP (see Figure 51 and Figure 52)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
20
MAX
1
2
t
t
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
ns
ns
c(AHCKRX)
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
7.5
w(AHCKRX)
greater of 2P
3
4
t
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X ext
ns
c(ACKRX)
w(ACKRX)
†
or 33 ns
t
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
ACLKR/X ext
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
14
6
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Setup time, AFSR/X input valid before ACLKR/X latches
data
5
6
7
8
t
su(AFRXC-ACKRX)
3
0
Hold time, AFSR/X input valid after ACLKR/X latches
data
t
h(ACKRX-AFRX)
su(AXR-ACKRX)
h(ACKRX-AXR)
3
8
Setup time, AXR input valid before ACLKR/X latches
data
t
t
3
1
Hold time, AXR input valid after ACLKR/X latches data
3
†
P = SYSCLK2 period.
‡
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McASP (see Figure 51
and Figure 52)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
20
MAX
9
t
t
Cycle time, AHCLKR/X
ns
ns
c(AHCKRX)
10
Pulse duration, AHCLKR/X high or low
(AH/2) − 2.5
w(AHCKRX)
greater of 2P
11
12
t
Cycle time, ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X int
ns
c(ACKRX)
w(ACKRX)
†
or 33 ns
t
Pulse duration, ACLKR/X high or low
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
ACLKR/X int
ACLKR/X ext
(A/2) − 2.5
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
−1
0
5
10
5
Delay time, ACLKR/X transmit edge to AFSX/R output
valid
13
14
15
t
t
t
d(ACKRX-AFRX)
−1
0
Delay time, ACLKX transmit edge to AXR output valid
d(ACKX-AXRV)
10
10
10
−1
−1
Disable time, AXR high impedance following last data bit
from ACLKR/X transmit edge
dis(ACKRX−AXRHZ)
†
‡
P = SYSCLK2 period.
AH = AHCLKR/X period in ns.
A = ACLKR/X period in ns.
124
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT (McASP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
2
1
2
AHCLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
4
3
4
†
‡
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)
6
5
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
8
7
AXR[n] (Data In/Receive)
A0 A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3
C31
†
‡
For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for falling
edge (to shift data in).
For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for rising
edge (to shift data in).
Figure 51. McASP Input Timings
125
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SERIAL PORT (McASP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
10
10
9
AHCLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
12
11
12
†
‡
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)
ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)
13
13
13
13
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
AXR[n] (Data Out/Transmit)
13
13
13
14
15
A0 A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3
C31
†
‡
For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for rising
edge (to shift data in).
For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP receiver is configured for falling
edge (to shift data in).
Figure 52. McASP Output Timings
126
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUITS (I2C) TIMING
†
timing requirements for I2C timings (see Figure 53)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
STANDARD
FAST
MODE
MIN MAX
10
MODE
MIN MAX
1
2
t
Cycle time, SCL
2.5
µs
µs
c(SCL)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
t
4.7
4
0.6
0.6
su(SCLH-SDAL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
3
t
µs
h(SCLL-SDAL)
4
5
t
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
4
1.3
0.6
µs
µs
ns
µs
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
ns
pF
w(SCLL)
t
Pulse duration, SCL high
w(SCLH)
‡
6
t
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
250
100
0
su(SDAV-SDLH)
2
§
0
§
¶
0.9
7
t
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I C bus devices)
h(SDA-SDLL)
w(SDAH)
r(SDA)
8
t
t
t
t
t
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START conditions
Rise time, SDA
4.7
1.3
#
#
#
#
9
1000 20 + 0.1C
300
300
300
300
b
b
b
b
10
11
12
13
14
15
Rise time, SCL
1000 20 + 0.1C
300 20 + 0.1C
300 20 + 0.1C
r(SCL)
Fall time, SDA
f(SDA)
Fall time, SCL
f(SCL)
t
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
Capacitive load for each bus line
4
0.6
0
su(SCLH-SDAH)
t
50
w(SP)
#
C
400
400
b
†
‡
2
The I C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered down.
2
2
A Fast-mode I C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I C-bus system, but the requirement t
su(SDA−SCLH)
This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period
of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line t max + t = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode
I C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the V
region of the falling edge of SCL.
≥ 250 ns must then be met.
r
su(SDA−SCLH)
2
§
of the SCL signal) to bridge the undefined
IHmin
¶
#
The maximum t
h(SDA−SCLL)
has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [t
] of the SCL signal.
w(SCLL)
= total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
C
b
11
9
SDA
SCL
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
2
Figure 53. I C Receive Timings
127
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUITS (I2C) TIMING (CONTINUED)
†
switching characteristics for I2C timings (see Figure 54)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
STANDARD
FAST
MODE
MIN MAX
10
MODE
MIN MAX
16
17
t
Cycle time, SCL
2.5
0.6
µs
µs
c(SCL)
t
Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START condition)
4.7
d(SCLH-SDAL)
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
18
t
4
0.6
µs
d(SDAL-SCLL)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
t
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
4
1.3
0.6
µs
µs
ns
µs
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
pF
w(SCLL)
t
Pulse duration, SCL high
w(SCLH)
t
Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high
250
0
100
d(SDAV-SDLH)
2
t
Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I C bus devices)
0
0.9
v(SDLL-SDAV)
t
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START conditions
4.7
1.3
w(SDAH)
r(SDA)
r(SCL)
f(SDA)
f(SCL)
†
†
†
†
t
t
t
t
Rise time, SDA
1000 20 + 0.1C
300
300
300
300
b
b
b
b
Rise time, SCL
1000 20 + 0.1C
300 20 + 0.1C
300 20 + 0.1C
Fall time, SDA
Fall time, SCL
t
Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)
Capacitance for each I2C pin
4
0.6
d(SCLH-SDAH)
C
10
10
p
†
C
= total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
b
26
24
SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
SCL
16
27
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
2
Figure 54. I C Transmit Timings
128
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING
†‡
timing requirements for host-port interface cycles (see Figure 55, Figure 56, Figure 57, and
Figure 58)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
§
1
2
t
Setup time, select signals valid before HSTROBE low
5
ns
ns
su(SELV-HSTBL)
§
t
Hold time, select signals valid after HSTROBE low
4
4P
4P
4P
5
h(HSTBL-SELV)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low (host read access)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low (host write access)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
3
t
ns
w(HSTBL)
4
t
t
t
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
w(HSTBH)
§
Setup time, select signals valid before HAS low
10
11
12
13
su(SELV-HASL)
h(HASL-SELV)
§
Hold time, select signals valid after HAS low
3
t
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
5
su(HDV-HSTBH)
t
3
h(HSTBH-HDV)
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be inactivated
until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete properly.
14
t
2
ns
h(HRDYL-HSTBL)
18
19
t
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
2
2
ns
ns
su(HASL-HSTBL)
t
h(HSTBL-HASL)
†
‡
§
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0], HR/W, and HHWIL.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during host-port interface
†‡
cycles (see Figure 55, Figure 56, Figure 57, and Figure 58)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
12
¶
5
6
7
t
Delay time, HCS to HRDY
1
ns
ns
ns
d(HCS-HRDY)
#
t
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high
3
2
12
d(HSTBL-HRDYH)
t
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read
d(HSTBL-HDLZ)
8
t
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
2P − 4
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
d(HDV-HRDYL)
9
t
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid
3
3
3
3
12
12
oh(HSTBH-HDV)
15
16
17
t
d(HSTBH-HDHZ)
t
12.5
12
d(HSTBL-HDV)
||
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HRDY high
t
d(HSTBH-HRDYH)
†
‡
¶
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
HCS enables HRDY, and HRDY is always low when HCS is high. The case where HRDY goes high when HCS falls indicates that HPI is busy
completing a previous HPID write or READ with autoincrement.
#
||
This parameter is used during an HPID read. At the beginning of the first half-word transfer on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the
request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads
the requested data into HPID.
This parameter is used after the second half-word of an HPID write or autoincrement read. HRDY remains low if the access is not an HPID write
or autoincrement read. Reading or writing to HPIC or HPIA does not affect the HRDY signal.
129
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
HHWIL
4
3
3
†
HSTROBE
HCS
15
9
15
9
7
16
HD[15:0] (output)
HRDY (case 1)
HRDY (case 2)
5
5
1st halfword
2nd halfword
5
8
8
17
17
6
†
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 55. HPI Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
†
HAS
19
11
19
11
10
10
10
10
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
11
11
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
4
3
‡
HSTROBE
18
18
HCS
15
15
7
9
16
9
17
17
HD[15:0] (output)
HRDY (case 1)
HRDY (case 2)
1st half-word
2nd half-word
5
8
8
5
5
†
‡
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 56. HPI Read Timing (HAS Used)
130
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
3
4
14
†
HSTROBE
HCS
HD[15:0] (input)
HRDY
12
12
13
2nd halfword
13
17
1st halfword
5
5
†
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 57. HPI Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
†
HAS
19
11
19
11
11
11
10
10
10
10
10
10
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
11
11
HHWIL
3
4
14
‡
HSTROBE
18
12
18
HCS
HD[15:0] (input)
HRDY
12
13
13
1st half-word
2nd half-word
5
5
17
†
‡
For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 58. HPI Write Timing (HAS Used)
131
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING
†‡
timing requirements for McBSP (see Figure 59)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
§
2
3
t
t
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
CLKR/X ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
2P
ns
ns
c(CKRX)
¶
0.5*t −1
c(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
w(CKRX)
9
5
6
t
t
t
t
t
t
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
su(FRH-CKRL)
h(CKRL-FRH)
su(DRV-CKRL)
h(CKRL-DRV)
su(FXH-CKXL)
h(CKXL-FXH)
1
6
3
8
0
3
4
9
1
6
3
7
8
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
10
11
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
†
‡
§
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P) and not faster than 75 Mbps (13.3 ns). This means that the maximum bit rate for
communications between the McBSP and other devices is 75 Mbps for 167-MHz and 225-MHz CPU clocks or 50 Mbps for 100-MHz CPU clock;
where the McBSP is either the master or the slave. Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The
maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications is 67 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle
time (2P), or 15 ns (67 MHz), whichever value is larger. For example, when running parts at 150 MHz (P = 6.7 ns), use 15 ns as the minimum
CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P =
33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port
is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM
= 0) in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY = 01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
¶
This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the resonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
132
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
†‡
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP (see Figure 59)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated from
CLKS input
1
t
1.8
10
ns
d(CKSH-CKRXH)
§¶
2
3
4
t
t
t
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
CLKR/X int
CLKR int
CLKX int
CLKX ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
2P
ns
ns
ns
c(CKRX)
#
#
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
C − 1
C + 1
w(CKRX)
−2
−2
2
3
3
9
4
d(CKRH-FRV)
9
t
t
t
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
ns
ns
ns
d(CKXH-FXV)
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)
d(CKXH-DXV)
−1
1.5
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX high
12
13
10
||
||
−3.2 + D1
0.5 + D1
4 + D2
10+ D2
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
||
||
FSX int
FSX ext
−1
2
7.5
14
t
ns
d(FXH-DXV)
ONLY applies when in data delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b)
mode
11.5
†
‡
§
¶
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P) and not faster than 75 Mbps (13.3 ns). This means that the maximum bit rate for
communications between the McBSP and other devices is 75 Mbps for 167-MHz and 225-MHz CPU clocks or 50 Mbps for 100-MHz CPU clock;
where the McBSP is either the master or the slave. Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The
maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications is 67 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle
time (2P), or 15 ns (67 MHz), whichever value is larger. For example, when running parts at 150 MHz (P = 6.7 ns), use 15 ns as the minimum
CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P =
33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port
is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM
= 0) in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY = 01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
C = H or L
#
S = sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
=
sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
If DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
||
If DXENA = 1, then D1 = 2P, D2 = 4P
133
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKS
1
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
DR
7
8
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
3
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)
13
(n-2)
13
14
13
12
Bit 0
DX
Bit(n-1)
(n-3)
Figure 59. McBSP Timings
134
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for FSR when GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 60)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4
MAX
1
2
t
t
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
ns
ns
su(FRH-CKSH)
4
h(CKSH-FRH)
CLKS
1
2
FSR external
CLKR/X (no need to resync)
CLKR/X (needs resync)
Figure 60. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1
†‡
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 61)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN
MIN
12
4
MAX
MAX
4
5
t
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
2 − 6P
ns
ns
su(DRV-CKXL)
5 + 12P
h(CKXL-DRV)
†
‡
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
135
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
†‡
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 61)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
§
MASTER
MIN MAX
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
¶
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low
T − 2 T + 3
L − 2 L + 3
ns
ns
ns
h(CKXL-FXL)
d(FXL-CKXH)
d(CKXH-DXV)
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
−3
4
6P + 2 10P + 17
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
6
t
L − 2 L + 3
ns
dis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
7
8
t
2P + 3
4P + 2
6P + 17
8P + 17
ns
ns
dis(FXH-DXHZ)
t
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
d(FXL-DXV)
†
‡
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
¶
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
8
FSX
7
6
3
DX
DR
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
4
5
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 61. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
136
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
†‡
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 62)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MASTER SLAVE
MIN
MIN
12
4
MAX
MAX
4
5
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
2 − 6P
ns
ns
su(DRV-CKXH)
t
5 + 12P
h(CKXH-DRV)
†
‡
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
†‡
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 62)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
§
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN MAX
MIN
L − 2
T − 2
−3
MAX
L + 3
T + 3
4
¶
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low
ns
ns
ns
h(CKXL-FXL)
d(FXL-CKXH)
d(CKXL-DXV)
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
6P + 2 10P + 17
6P + 3 10P + 17
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
6
t
−2
4
ns
ns
dis(CKXL-DXHZ)
7
t
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
H − 2 H + 6.5
4P + 2
8P + 17
d(FXL-DXV)
†
‡
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
¶
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
137
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKX
FSX
DX
1
2
7
6
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-3)
(n-4)
4
5
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-4)
Figure 62. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
†‡
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 63)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MASTER SLAVE
MIN
MIN
12
4
MAX
MAX
4
5
t
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
2 − 6P
ns
ns
su(DRV-CKXH)
5 + 12P
h(CKXH-DRV)
†
‡
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
138
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
†‡
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 63)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
§
MASTER
MIN MAX
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
¶
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high
T − 2 T + 3
H − 2 H + 3
ns
ns
ns
h(CKXH-FXL)
d(FXL-CKXL)
d(CKXL-DXV)
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
−3
4
6P + 2 10P + 17
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
6
t
H − 2 H + 3
ns
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
7
8
t
2P + 3
4P + 2
6P + 17
8P + 17
ns
ns
dis(FXH-DXHZ)
t
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
d(FXL-DXV)
†
‡
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
¶
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
8
FSX
7
6
3
DX
DR
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
4
5
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 63. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
139
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
†‡
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 64)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MASTER SLAVE
MIN
MIN
12
4
MAX
MAX
4
5
t
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
2 − 6P
ns
ns
su(DRV-CKXH)
t
5 + 12P
h(CKXH-DRV)
†
‡
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
†‡
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 64)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
GDPA/ZDPA −200
§
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN MAX
MIN
H − 2
T − 2
−3
MAX
H + 3
T + 3
4
¶
1
2
3
t
t
t
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high
ns
ns
ns
h(CKXH-FXL)
d(FXL-CKXL)
d(CKXH-DXV)
#
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
6P + 2 10P + 17
6P + 3 10P + 17
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
6
t
−2
4
ns
ns
dis(CKXH-DXHZ)
7
t
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
L − 2 L + 6.5
4P + 2
8P + 17
d(FXL-DXV)
†
‡
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
=
Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
¶
#
FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
140
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKX
FSX
DX
1
2
7
6
3
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
4
5
DR
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 64. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
141
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
TIMER TIMING
†
timing requirements for timer inputs (see Figure 65)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
2P
MAX
1
2
t
t
Pulse duration, TINP high
Pulse duration, TINP low
ns
ns
w(TINPH)
2P
w(TINPL)
†
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
†
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for timer outputs
(see Figure 65)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
4P − 3
4P − 3
MAX
3
4
t
t
Pulse duration, TOUT high
Pulse duration, TOUT low
ns
ns
w(TOUTH)
w(TOUTL)
†
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
2
1
TINPx
4
3
TOUTx
Figure 65. Timer Timing
142
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT (GPIO) PORT TIMING
†‡
timing requirements for GPIO inputs (see Figure 66)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4P
MAX
1
2
t
t
Pulse duration, GPIx high
Pulse duration, GPIx low
ns
ns
w(GPIH)
4P
w(GPIL)
†
‡
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the DSP recognize the GPIx
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to at least 24P to allow the DSP enough time to access
the GPIO register through the CFGBUS.
†§
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for GPIO outputs
(see Figure 66)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA -167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
12P − 3
12P − 3
MAX
3
4
t
t
Pulse duration, GPOx high
Pulse duration, GPOx low
ns
ns
w(GPOH)
w(GPOL)
†
§
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 300 MHz, use P = 3.3 ns.
The number of CFGBUS cycles between two back-to-back CFGBUS writes to the GPIO register is 12 SYSCLK1 cycles; therefore, the minimum
GPOx pulse width is 12P.
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 66. GPIO Port Timing
143
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
JTAG TEST-PORT TIMING
timing requirements for JTAG test port (see Figure 67)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA
NO.
UNIT
-167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MIN
35
10
7
MAX
1
3
4
t
t
t
Cycle time, TCK
ns
ns
ns
c(TCK)
Setup time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid before TCK high
Hold time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid after TCK high
su(TDIV-TCKH)
h(TCKH-TDIV)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for JTAG test port
(see Figure 67)
PYP-200,-225
GDP/ZDP -225, -300
PYPA
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
-167, -200
GDPA/ZDPA −200
MIN
MAX
15
2
t
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
0
ns
d(TCKL-TDOV)
1
TCK
TDO
2
2
4
3
TDI/TMS/TRST
Figure 67. JTAG Test-Port Timing
144
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
MECHANICAL DATA
The following tables show the thermal resistance characteristics for the GDP and ZDP mechanical packages.
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) for GDP
†
NO
°C/W
Air Flow (m/s)
Two Signals, Two Planes (4-Layer Board)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RΘ
Junction-to-case
9.7
1.5
19
22
21
20
19
18
16
N/A
0.0
N/A
0.0
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
0.0
JC
Psi
Junction-to-package top
Junction-to-board
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-board
JT
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
JB
JA
JA
JA
JA
JA
JB
Psi
†
m/s = meters per second
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) for ZDP
†
NO
°C/W
Air Flow (m/s)
Two Signals, Two Planes (4-Layer Board)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RΘ
Junction-to-case
9.7
1.5
19
22
21
20
19
18
16
N/A
0.0
N/A
0.0
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
0.0
JC
Psi
Junction-to-package top
Junction-to-board
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-board
JT
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
RΘ
JB
JA
JA
JA
JA
JA
JB
Psi
†
m/s = meters per second
145
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈꢉ ꢃꢊ
ꢋ ꢌ ꢍꢎꢀ ꢏ ꢐ ꢑꢒꢓꢍꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑ ꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂ ꢏ ꢑꢐ ꢎꢌ ꢓ ꢕꢍ ꢆꢖꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
The following table shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the PYP mechanical package.
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PQFP-G208 package) for PYP
NO
°C/W
Junction-to-Pad
Two Signals, Two Planes (4-Layer Board) − 208-pin PYP
1
RΘ
Junction-to-pad, 26 x 26 copper pad on top and bottom of PCB with solder connection and vias going to
GND plane, isolated from power plane.
0.2
JP
Junction-to-Package Top
Two Signals, Two Planes (4-Layer Board) − 208-pin PYP
2
3
Psi
Psi
Junction-to-package top, 26 x 26 copper pad on top and bottom of PCB with solder connection and vias
going to GND plane, isolated from power plane.
0.18
0.23
JT
Junction-to-package top, 7.5 x 7.5 copper pad on top and bottom of PCB with solder connection and
vias going to GND plane, isolated from power plane.
JT
Two Signals (2-Layer Board)
4
5
Psi
Psi
Junction-to-package top, 26 x 26 copper pad on top of PCB with solder connection and vias going to
copper plane on bottom of board.
0.18
0.23
JT
Junction-to-package top, 7.5 x 7.5 copper pad on top of PCB with solder connection and vias going to
copper plane on bottom of board.
JT
Junction-to-Still Air
Two Signals, Two Planes (4-Layer Board) − 208-pin PYP
6
7
RΘ
RΘ
Junction-to-still air, 26 x 26 copper pad on top and bottom of PCB with solder connection and vias going
to GND plane, isolated from power plane.
13
20
JA
Junction-to-still air, 7.5 x 7.5 copper pad on top and bottom of PCB with solder connection and vias
going to GND plane, isolated from power plane.
JA
Two Signals (2-Layer Board)
8
9
RΘ
RΘ
Junction-to-still air, 26 x 26 copper pad on top of PCB with solder connection and vias going to copper
plane on bottom of board.
14
20
JA
Junction-to-still air, 7.5 x 7.5 copper pad on top of PCB with solder connection and vias going to copper
plane on bottom of board.
JA
146
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ꢀ ꢁꢂ ꢃꢄ ꢅꢆ ꢇꢈ ꢉꢃ ꢊ
ꢋ ꢌꢍ ꢎꢀ ꢏꢐꢑ ꢒꢓ ꢍꢏ ꢐꢀ ꢔꢏ ꢑꢏ ꢀꢎꢌ ꢂꢏ ꢑ ꢐꢎꢌ ꢓꢕ ꢍ ꢆꢖ ꢂ ꢂꢍ ꢕ
SPRS294B − OCTOBER 2005 − REVISED JUNE 2006
packaging information
For proper device thermal performance, the thermal pad must be soldered to an external ground thermal plane.
This pad is electrically and thermally connected to the backside of the die. For the TMS320C6713B 208−Pin
PowerPAD plastic quad flatpack, the external thermal pad dimensions are: 7.2 x 7.2 mm and the thermal pad
is externally flush with the mold compound.
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current released data available for the
designated device(s). This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
147
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
5-Apr-2010
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status (1)
Package Package
Pins Package Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish MSL Peak Temp (3)
Qty
Type
Drawing
TMS320C6713BGDP225
TMS320C6713BGDP300
TMS320C6713BPYP200
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
BGA
GDP
272
272
208
40
40
TBD
TBD
SNPB
SNPB
Level-3-220C-168 HR
Level-3-220C-168 HR
BGA
GDP
HLQFP
PYP
36 Green (RoHS & CU NIPDAU Level-4-260C-72 HR
no Sb/Br)
TMS320C6713BZDP225
TMS320C6713BZDP300
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
BGA
BGA
ZDP
ZDP
272
272
40
40
40
Pb-Free
(RoHS)
SNAGCU
SNAGCU
SNPB
Level-3-260C-168 HR
Level-3-260C-168 HR
Level-3-220C-168 HR
Pb-Free
(RoHS)
TMS32C6713BGDPA200
TMS32C6713BPYPA167
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
BGA
GDP
PYP
272
208
TBD
HLQFP
36 Green (RoHS & CU NIPDAU Level-4-260C-72 HR
no Sb/Br)
TMS32C6713BPYPA200
TMS32C6713BZDPA200
TMX320C6713BGDP
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
HLQFP
BGA
PYP
ZDP
GDP
208
272
272
36 Green (RoHS & CU NIPDAU Level-4-260C-72 HR
no Sb/Br)
40
Pb-Free
(RoHS)
SNAGCU
Level-3-260C-168 HR
OBSOLETE
BGA
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in
a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2)
Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check
http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements
for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered
at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and
package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS
compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame
retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material)
(3)
MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder
temperature.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is
provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the
accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take
reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on
incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited
information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI
to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 1
MECHANICAL DATA
MPBG274 – MAY 2002
GDP (S–PBGA–N272)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
27,20
26,80
24,20
23,80
SQ
SQ
24,13 TYP
1,27
0,635
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
1,27
K
J
H
G
F
0,635
A1 Corner
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
5
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19
10 12 14 16 18 20
2
4
6
1,22
1,12
Bottom View
2,57 MAX
Seating Plane
0,15
0,90
0,60
0,65
0,57
0,10
0,70
0,50
4204396/A 04/02
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MO-151
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
MECHANICAL DATA
MPBG276 – MAY 2002
ZDP (S–PBGA–N272)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
27,20
26,80
24,20
23,80
SQ
SQ
24,13 TYP
1,27
0,635
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
1,27
K
J
H
G
F
0,635
A1 Corner
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
5
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19
10 12 14 16 18 20
2
4
6
1,22
1,12
Bottom View
2,57 MAX
Seating Plane
0,15
0,90
0,60
0,65
0,57
0,10
0,70
0,50
4204398/A 04/02
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MO-151
D. This package is lead-free.
1
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products
Applications
Audio
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
dataconverter.ti.com
www.dlp.com
www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters
DLP® Products
Automotive
www.ti.com/automotive
www.ti.com/communications
Communications and
Telecom
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Computers and
Peripherals
www.ti.com/computers
Clocks and Timers
Interface
www.ti.com/clocks
interface.ti.com
logic.ti.com
Consumer Electronics
Energy
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
www.ti.com/energy
Logic
Industrial
www.ti.com/industrial
Power Mgmt
Microcontrollers
RFID
power.ti.com
Medical
www.ti.com/medical
microcontroller.ti.com
www.ti-rfid.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Space, Avionics &
Defense
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf
Video and Imaging
Wireless
www.ti.com/video
www.ti.com/wireless-apps
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
相关型号:
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明